APTARE Storage Console UserGuide

APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

7.2

Copyrights and TrademarksCopyright © 2007-2009 APTARE, Inc., All rights reserved.

The information contained in this book is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.

APTARE® and StorageConsole® are registered trademarks of APTARE, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and certain other countries.HP Data Protector is a trademark of HP.Hitachi is a trademark of Hitachi Data Systems.Acrobat and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.Microsoft, Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.Macintosh, Mac, Apple, Safari, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.EMC NetWorker is a registered trademark of EMC Corporation.NetBackup and Backup Exec are registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation.NetApp, Data ONTAP, SnapVault, SnapMirror, and FlexVol are registered trademarks of NetApp, Inc.VMware is a registered trademark of VMware, Inc.Other company and product names mentioned herein can be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and should be treated as such.

Publication Change RecordThe following table records all revisions to this publication. This first entry is always the publication’s initial release. Each entry indicates the date of the release and the number of the system release to which the revision corresponds.

Doc Revision ID Date System ReleaseMK-97APT025-01 February 2008 APTARE StorageConsole, v6.5

March 2008 APTARE StorageConsole, v6.5.19April 2008May 2008June 2008July 2008

APTARE StorageConsole, v6.5.22, v6.5.23, v6.5.24 and v6.5.25

September 2008 APTARE StorageConsole, v6.6December 2008 APTARE StorageConsole, v6.6 Service Pack 1April 2009 APTARE StorageConsole, v7.0September 2009 APTARE StorageConsole, v7.1

Copyrights and Trademarks 3

July 2009 APTARE StorageConsole, v7.0.04 P2August 2009 APTARE StorageConsole, v7.2

Doc Revision ID Date System Release

4 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

Contents

Preface iAbout This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iWho Should Use This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iRelated Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iTypographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiContacting APTARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Chapter 1Getting Acquainted With Reports 1About the Portal User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Navigation Pane (Report Navigator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Content Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Toolbar Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Available Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Tables and Charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Out-of-the-Box Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Logging In/Off the Portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Managing My Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Changing Your Login Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Chapter 2Generating and Maintaining Reports 13About the Report Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Menu Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Report Template and Report Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Units of Measure in Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

About Report Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Selecting Report Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Listing Server Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Searching for Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Searching for Servers in Report Designers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Report Designer Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Backup Manager Primary Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Backup Manager Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Capacity Manager Primary Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Capacity Manager Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Generating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Filter Report Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Filter Report Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Sorting Columns in Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Setting Refresh Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Modifying Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Saving Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Deleting Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Searching for a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Chapter 3Distributing, Sharing, Scheduling, Alerting 39Exporting Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Scheduling Exported Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Emailing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Scheduling Emailed Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Contents 5

6 APTARE S

Scheduled Reports Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Deleting Scheduled Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Alerting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Configuring an Alert for a Tabular Report Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Sharing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Technical Community Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Adding Notes to Backup Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Chapter 4Organizing Reports 55Task Overview: Organizing Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Creating Dashboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Adding Reports to Dashboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Dashboard Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Deleting Reports from Dashboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Adding Reports to a Custom Menu Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Creating a Custom Menu Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Changing Your Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Chapter 5Custom Reports 61About Custom Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Using Report Template Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Creating a Custom Report Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Configure Report Designer Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Specify the SQL Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Sample Queries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Using Functions in Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Format the Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Advanced Report Template Options - Drilldowns . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Edit a Custom Report Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Exporting/Importing Report Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Export a Report Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Import a Report Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Chapter 6System Administration Reports 99Collection Message Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Collection Message Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Data Collection Message Detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Database Error Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Report Activity Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Report Activity Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Monitoring Data Collection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Scheduled Reports Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Top Running Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Top Running Report Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Version History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Data Collector Status Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Chapter 7Backup Manager Management Reports 111Using Backup Manager Reports for Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Job Status Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Job Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Job Summary - Heterogeneous Backup Products . . . . . . . . . . . .116Backup Exec Job Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

torageConsole Report User’s Guide

HP Data Protector Job Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118NetBackup Job Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118NetWorker Job Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119TSM Job Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Job Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Adding a Note to a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Job Volume Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Job Duration Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Error Log Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Consecutive Errors By Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Largest Backup Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Monthly Backup Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Job Summary By Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Running and Queued Job Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

NetBackup Running and Queued Jobs Summary . . . . . . . . . . . 136NetWorker Running Save Sets Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

HP Data Protector Session Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137HP Data Protector Session Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Chapter 8Backup Administration Reports 141Operations Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Command Center Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Data Protection Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Message of the Day Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Server Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Server Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Mission Control Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Tailoring the Report Output by Backup Product . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Client Protection Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155TSM Storage Pools Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157TSM Process Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Client Job Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Job Throughput Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Job Activity Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Chapter 9Media Management Reports 163Using Media Management Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Current Media Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Tape Media Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Tape Media Detail Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

HP Data Protector Tape Media Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167NetBackup Tape Media Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167NetWorker Tape Media Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168TSM Tape Media Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Chapter 10Backup SLA Reports 171Available SLA Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Backup Start Time SLA Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Determining and Improving Backup Start Time Performance . . . . . . . 174Backup Status SLA Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Changing the Success Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Determining and Improving Backup Success Performance . . . . . . . . 176Backup Duration SLA Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Determining and Improving Backup Duration Performance . . . . . . . . 178

Contents 7

8 APTARE S

Chapter 11Backup Storage Utilization Reports 179Using Storage Utilization Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Disk Usage and Performance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Tape Library and Drive Utilization Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Storage Unit Detail Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Storage Unit Event Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Drive Utilization and Performance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Drive Performance Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

NetBackup Drive Performance Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Drive Performance Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192TSM Database Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193TSM Recovery Log Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Storage Unit Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Real Time Library and Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Chapter 12Backup Manager Forecasting Reports 199Forecasting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Media Forecasting Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Media Availability Forecast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Media Consumption Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Media Usage Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Tape Drive Usage and Forecast Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Scratch Pool Forecast Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207NetBackup Library Capacity Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Chapter 13Backup Billing and Usage Reports 211Available Billing and Usage Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211Creating a Billing and Chargeback Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Determining Media Chargebacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Determining Backup Chargebacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Billing and Chargeback Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Server Consumption Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Chapter 14Backup Policies Reports 219NetBackup Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Backup Policy Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220TSM Policy Domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Policy Domain Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223NetWorker Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Group Detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Client Instance Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

HP Data Protector Backup Specification Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . 228HP Data Protector Backup Specification Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Chapter 15Capacity Manager Reports 231Overview of the Enterprise Storage Provisioning Process . . . . . . . . . 232Overview of Capacity Manager Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Why Capacity Manager? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Capacity Manager Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Capacity Manager Quick-Start List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Array Capacity and Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238List Array Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

torageConsole Report User’s Guide

Host Capacity & Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Host Utilization Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245LUN Utilization Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Array Group Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

EMC CLARiiON Storage Array Group Specifics . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Host HBA Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Array Port Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Array Capacity Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Host Capacity Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Applications At Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Over-Provisioned Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Application Storage Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Application Sub-Level of the Application Storage Dashboard . . . . . . . 267Available/Reclaimable Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Array Utilization Dashboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Array Utilization Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Allocated but Unused LUNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Allocated but Undiscovered LUNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Unallocated LUNs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Suspected De-provisioned Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Unused Partitions/Logical Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Unused Disks/Volume Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Capacity Chargeback and Billing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Capacity Chargeback By Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Chargeback Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Chargeback Policy Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Policy Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

LUNs At Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Over-Provisioned LUNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Hosts at Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Over-Provisioned Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Chapter 16NetApp Capacity Reports 289Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290NetApp Storage System Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294NetApp LUN Utilization Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297NetApp Aggregate Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299NetApp Aggregate Detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301NetApp Plex Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302NetApp Volume Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303NetApp Volume Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305NetApp NFS Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308NetApp CIFS Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309QTree Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310NetApp Snapshot Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311Array iSCSI Port Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312NetApp Disk Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313NetApp Aggregates at Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314NetApp Volumes at Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Thin Provisioning Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Chapter 17IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports 317Overview of IBM Array Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Pre-Requisites for IBM Array Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Enterprise Array View) . . . . . . . . . 320Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Subsystem Array View) . . . . . . . . . 320

Contents 9

10 APTARE

IBM Array Site Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321IBM Array Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323IBM Array Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325IBM Rank Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330IBM Extent Pool Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332IBM Disk Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Chapter 18HDS Dynamic Provisioning Reports 337Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Hitachi Disk Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Array Capacity & Utilization (Hitachi Arrays & HDP View) . . . . . . . . . 343

Chapter 19Virtualization Manager Reports 347Virtualization Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Overview of Virtualization Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Understanding the Datastore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Using Virtualization Manager for Planning and Monitoring . . . . . . . 351

VM Server Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352VM Server Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354VM Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357VM Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Logical Disk Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362VM Files Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363Datastore Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365Datastore Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Datastore Usage Breakdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Physical Disk Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Physical Disk Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373VM Performance Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Focusing on Specific I/O Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375VM Performance Over Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Datastore Performance Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Physical Disk Performance Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Physical Disk Performance Over Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382VM Size Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383Datastore Capacity Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Index 385

StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

Chapter 0PrefaceThank you for purchasing APTARE® StorageConsole.

About This BookThis book describes how to generate, distribute, organize, and share reports. This book assumes that you have read the APTARE StorageConsole Getting Started Guide for Report Users.

Who Should Use This BookAPTARE recognizes that the Portal is useful to a number of different users:• Storage Administrators• Storage Managers/Directors• Legal Compliance Professionals• Capacity Planners• Billing and Chargeback Professionals

Related DocumentationAPTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5APTARE, Inc. welcomes your feedback, which we regularly incorporate into the documentation.The following documents contain additional information relevant to installing, maintaining, and administering this system.• APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes - This document outlines what’s new in the release

and what known issues were fixed in the release. and is available online at www.aptare.com• APTARE StorageConsole Certified Configurations Guide - This document provides a list

of the supported products and hardware requirements. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.

• APTARE StorageConsole Getting Started Guide for Report Users - This book provides a basic introduction to the Portal and describes the basic workflow to begin using the reports. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. Also, all the topics in this guide are available in the online help.

• APTARE StorageConsole Getting Started Guide for Administrators - This book describes the basic workflow involved in setting up the backup reporting environment. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. Also, all the topics in this guide are available in the online help.

About This Book i

• APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for Symantec Backup Exec - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.

• APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for HP Data Protector - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.

• APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for EMC NetWorker - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.

• APTARE StorageConsole Agent Installation Guide for NetBackup - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.

• APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for IBM Tivoli Storage Manager - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.

• APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for Capacity Manager - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.

• APTARE StorageConsole Upgrade Guide - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to upgrade to a major release of the software. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.

• Hitachi Storage Viewer Portal Installation Guide - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install the Portal Server and the Reporting Database. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.

• APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide - This book describes how to generate, distribute, organize, and share reports. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. Also, all the topics in this guide are available in the online help.

• APTARE StorageConsole Application Administrator’s Guide - This book provides information about how to manage the Portal to support report generation and report access. These tasks are usually performed through the Portal user interface. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. Also, all the topics in this guide are available in the online help.

• APTARE StorageConsole System Administrator’s Guide - This book provides information to help you maintain and monitor the entire platform to ensure its availability. This book covers mostly back-end administration—administration tasks usually performed on the Portal Server and Database Server. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.

• APTARE StorageConsole Database Programmer’s Guide - This book provides information about how to query the Reporting Database using the provided database views. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.

ii Administrator’s Guide

Typographical ConventionsThis document uses different typefaces to indicate different kinds of information. The following table explains these typographical conventions.

Font MeaningTypewriter Indicates error messages, file name, or screen output.Bold In a command line, indicates information to be entered

exactly as shown.Italics Indicates a variable for which you should substitute an

appropriate value.

Typographical Conventions iii

Contacting APTARE

Technical Support: Customer Care Group• [email protected] or • 1-408-871-9848• 1-866-9-APTARE, Option #1, 6:30am - 5:30pm

Pacific Time

Sales: • [email protected] or• 1 866-9-APTARE, Option

#2

iv Administrator’s Guide

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 1Chapter 0Getting Acquainted With Reports

This chapter covers the following topics:• About the Portal User Interface• Available Reports• Logging In/Off the Portal• Managing My Profile• Changing Your Login Password

About the Portal User InterfaceThe reporting database is accessed via a centralized web portal interface, which follows web-based standards to offer common navigation features. Using your favorite browser, you can securely view backup reporting and management details. Interactive dashboards offer drill-down access to file-level specifics.

Navigation Pane (Report Navigator)The Navigation pane, at the left of the Portal window, provides access to dashboards and reports. Categories in this list can be expanded to reveal additional reports and then collapsed to reduce screen clutter. Click on the arrow point to the left of the entries to expand/collapse the list..

The Report Finder search box offers an additional method for selecting a specific report or for displaying a list of similar reports. The Finder supports a word or partial word search. For example, to view a list of all of your log reports, type log in the

About the Portal User Interface 1

Report Finder search box. Likewise, to list reports related to SLAs, type SLA in the Report Finder box Tip: To refresh the Navigation pane, go to the Report Finder box and click Clear.

Content PaneThe Content pane is the main display area to the right of the Navigation pane. The Content pane shows the details of elements that you select in the Navigation pane.When you select multiple reports or views from the Navigation pane, the Content pane launches tabbed displays to enable easy, concurrent access to several reports. Use typical browser actions to remove a tabbed display or to switch between tabbed views.


Toolbar OptionsAlong the top border of the Portal window, a toolbar categorizes your options.

:The items that you see depend on your permissions—User or Administrator privileges, as shown in Table 1.1. For details about these features, see:• APTARE StorageConsole Application Administrator’s Guide• APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

Tool Item User Admin Documented in:

Report

Close All Tabs x x self-explanatoryNew Dashboard x x Report User’s GuideImport Template x x Report User’s GuideTemplate Designer x x Report User’s GuideMy Scheduled Reports x x Report User’s GuideMy Shared Reports x x Report User’s GuideGo To My Homepage x x Report User’s GuideSet This Report As My Homepage x x Report User’s Guide

Tools

Search x x Report User’s GuideCreate Restore Job x x Report User’s GuideManage Restore Jobs x Application Administrator’s

GuideData Collection Status x Application Administrator’s

GuideMy Profile x x Report User’s GuideChange My Password x x Report User’s Guide

Table 1.1 Portal Toolbar Options

About the Portal User Interface 3

Admin

Users and Privileges x Application Administrator’s Guide

User Groups x Application Administrator’s Guide

Server & Server Group Admin x Application Administrator’s Guide

Domains x Application Administrator’s Guide

Attributes x Application Administrator’s Guide

Schedules x Application Administrator’s Guide

Backup Windows x Application Administrator’s Guide

Threshold Policies x Application Administrator’s Guide

Discovery Policies x Application Administrator’s Guide

Data Collector Policies x Application Administrator’s Guide

Billing and Usage Policies x x Report User’s GuideCapacity Chargeback Policies x x Report User’s GuideSLA Group Policies x x Application Administrator’s

Guide

Help

Help Topics x x self-explanatoryForum x Links to the community

forum web siteAbout x x self-explanatory

Logout End your session. x x Report User’s Guide

Tool Item User Admin Documented in:

Table 1.1 Portal Toolbar Options


r,

an

tal

s

Available ReportsThe Portal includes a number of pre-defined reports, which you can tailor and save as report instances to meet your specific reporting requirements. The best way to become acquainted with available reports is to expand the list in the Navigation pane, to the left of the Portal’s browser window. Reports are designed to enable views of high-level information, with drilldown access to details in sub-reports. This hierarchy is simply organized as:• Tier 1 - High-level reports present data in the form of tables and charts.• Tier 2 - Summary level data is presented in tabular form. The rows in the table are the details

that were aggregated in the high-level chart.• Tier 3 - Detail reports display specifics related to the drilldown selection in a Tier 2 report.

Tables and Charts• Tables display data in rows and columns, with highlighted links that enable drilldown access

to additional details. When you click a link, a new report is generated in a new pane with a tab displayed at the top of the Content pane. Tabular data can be sorted in ascending or descending order by clicking the column headers. Some tables use color to highlight potential problems. For example, the Host Utilization Detail report highlights values when they fall below the availability threshold.

• Charts utilize colored bar graphs and pie charts to enable at-a-glance analysis. Multi-colored bars can be deciphered with a few simple moves of your mouse. Glide your cursor over each colored section of a bar or pie to view a text description of what that portion of the bar/pie represents. For example, in the Job Status Summary report, a single bar will reflect the number of event failures, the number of warnings, and the number of successful backups. In addition, some charts display a trend line graph with data points represented as percentages. If you move your cursor over a particular data point arrow, the performance percentage value will be displayed.

Out-of-the-Box ReportsThe following out-of-the-box reports are available from the menu at the left of the browser window.

System Status and Backup Manager ReportsSystem Status ReportsCollection Message Summary Lists issues that occurred during the data collection process for Legato NetWorke

HP Data Protector, and Capacity Manager Host ResourcesDatabase Error Summary Lists database errors that may need to be brought to the attention of Customer

Support; however, user‐resolvable errors may also be included in the summary.Report Activity Summary Bar chart representing run‐time of reports, with a drilldown to detailsScheduled Reports Summary Table of reports that are scheduled as alerts, exports, or emailsTop Running Reports Lists the reports that have been running for long periods of time or that have run

excessive number of times. The average execution time includes not only the database query, but also the time associated with building the report on the Porserver.

Version History Historical list of software upgrade versionsData Collector Status Summary List of data collectors, which indicates if there have been collection gaps or issue

Available Reports 5

e

rill

rs

ort,

eal

p

ion

e

Management ReportsJob Status Summary Displays a bar chart that aggregates jobs that succeeded, failed, or produced

warning messages. Provides drill‐down access to the Job Summary report, wheryou’ll find specific status messages and scheduling information.

Job Summary Tabular list of backup jobs, with drill‐downs to detailsJob Volume Summary Bar chart that represents “how much” data has been backed up each day; use to

ascertain problematic time periods, consumption trends, and scheduling peaks; Ddown to the Job Summary report.

Job Duration Bar chart of job duration for backup and restore jobsError Log Summary Tabular report that lists backup failure detailsConsecutive Errors By Client Tabular report of consecutive errors and consecutive daysLargest Backup Volume Pie chart representing a snapshot of the largest server backup consumersMonthly Backup Summary Table of the monthly backup summaryJob Summary by Server Table of the number of jobs and their status: running, queued, warnings, errorsRunning & Queued Job Summary Displays any job that was running or queued at the time the management serve

were polled.HPD Session Summary HP Data Protector session summaryAdministration ReportsData Protection Dashboard Dashboard view of Message of the Day, Job Status Summary, Mission Control rep

and Monthly Backup SummaryCommand Center Dashboard Dashboard view of Real Time Job Summary, Real Time Library and Drive Status, R

Time Storage Unit Utilization, and Running and Queued Jobs SummaryOperations Dashboard Dashboard view of Job Status Summary, Current Media Summary, Largest Backu

Volume, and Storage Unit StatusMission Control Snapshot of backup/restore event status, with easily identifiable indicators of

success/failure and drilldowns to detailsTSM Storage Pools Dashboard Dashboard of TSM Storage Pool detailsClient Protection Summary Tabular report that identifies exposure and threats to an enterprise data protect

environmentClient Job Histogram Display either Job Throughput or Job ActivityMedia Management ReportsTape Media Summary Table of Tape Media usageCurrent Media Summary Pie charts illustrating current media utilizationSLA ReportsBackup Status SLA Bar chart representing the success/failure performanceBackup Start Time SLA Bar chart displaying the total number of backups that began within a specific tim

range of their scheduled start timeBackup Duration SLA Bar chart representing backup duration SLAStorage Utilization ReportsDisk Usage & Performance Bar and pie charts representing volume & throughput & consumptionTape Library & Drive Utilization Bar chart of library utilizationDrive Utilization & Performance Bar charts of drive activityDrive Performance Summary Drive performance high‐level details, with drilldownsTSM Database Utilization Usage and capacity trending of TSM database—bar chartStorage Unit Summary Library and file system details for NetBackup storage unitsStorage Unit Detail Table of storage unit event detailsReal Time Library & Drive Status High‐level detail of tape libraries in your storage environmentForecasting & Capacity PlanningMedia Forecasting Dashboard Bar charts, pie charts, and tables representing forecasted consumptionMedia Availability Forecast Bar chart forecasting consumption vs. available mediaMedia Consumption Forecast Bar chart representing historical tape usage with projected needTape Drive Usage & Forecast Bar chart shows maximum/average used, with maximum/average forecastedScratch Pool Forecast Bar chart of available and forecasted scratch pool storageLibrary Capacity Forecast Bar chart of NetBackup tape library usage and forecast


Capacity Manager Reports

Billing & Usage ReportsBilling & Chargeback Summary Table of usage and billing details by serverServer Consumption Summary Table of consumption details by serverBackup PoliciesNetBackup Policies Table listing NetBackup policies, with drilldowns to detailsTSM Policy Domains Table listing TSM policy domains, with drilldowns to detailsNetWorker Groups Table listing NetWorker groups, with drilldowns to detailsHPD Backup Specification Table listing HP Data Protector specifications, with drilldowns to details

Capacity Manager Reports DescriptionStorage Capacity & Utilization

Array Capacity & Utilization Overview of storage array capacity & utilization. Use this report to identify under-utilized storage arrays

Host Capacity & Utilization Overview of host utilization. Drill down to details in the Host Utilization Detail report.LUN Utilization Summary If LUNs are not being used efficiently, you want to know so that you can change their size or

reassign them altogether. View all the LUN mapping details, such as mount points and file systems.

Array Port Utilization Lists the physical/logical port connections between the host’s HBA and the storage array. Use this report to troubleshoot connectivity issues and to re-configure when hosts/arrays are taken out of service. This report provides information you can use to manage load-balancing across array ports.

Host HBA Summary Lists HBA details for hostsNetApp Aggregate Summary Summary of how physical aggregates are configured to manage disks, RAID groups, and

plexes.NetApp Volume Summary Summary of the logical volume with links to the associated QTree, LUN, and Snapshot details.NetApp NFS Summary Lists the volumes that are exported via NFS.NetApp CIFS Summary Lists the volumes that have been exported to Windows hosts via CIFS shares.NetApp QTree Summary Summary of the quota management configurationsNetApp Snapshot Summary Lists snapshot details for the report’s time interval.NetApp Disk Summary Lists the disks within a storage systemIBM Array Site Summary Tabular list of Array Site configurations and capacityIBM Array Summary Tabular list of IBM Array configurations and capacityIBM Rank Summary Tabular list of IBM Array Ranks, with configuration and capacity detailsIBM Extent Pool Summary Tabular list of IBM Extent Pools, with configuration and capacity detailsIBM Disk Summary Tabular list of disks within IBM Storage Arrays, with configuration and capacity detailsHitachi DP Pool Summary Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Summary, with capacity and threshold detailsHitachi DP Pool Utilization Bar chart of dynamic provisioning consumptionHitachi Disk Summary Disk device detailsStorage Capacity & Forecast

Array Capacity Forecast Project growth in storage usage. You can generate the report by the following criteria:²Historical date range²Forecast horizon (date range)²Storage Array Group²Forecast by Array Capacity or LUN Capacity

Host Capacity Forecast At-a-glance overview of historical and predicted usage—from the host’s perspective. You can narrow the scope of this report by specifying a storage type filter of: SAN, DAS, or NAS.

Available or Reclaimable StorageArray Utilization Dashboard Bar charts and tables provide capacity and usage details, enabling a quick glance of potential

reclaimable storageArray Utilization Summary Displays a summary listing of each array’s capacity and usage.

Available Reports 7

Virtualization Manager Reports

Allocated but Unused LUNs All the necessary LUN configuration steps have been completed to make this storage available, but it still remains unused. The LUNs have no knowledge of the disks, partitions, or volume groups on the hosts associated with the LUN storage paths.

Allocated but Undiscovered LUNs These LUNs have storage paths, but have no knowledge of the disks, partitions, or volume groups on the hosts associated with those storage paths.

Unallocated LUNs Lists LUNs that are not allocated to any hosts. These LUNs have no storage paths.Suspected De-provisioned Hosts Storage often is allocated from a storage array and provisioned to a host, but when that host is

re-assigned or de-provisioned, the storage remains unused. This report list hosts that are candidates for re-assignment.

Unused Partitions/Logical Volumes

This report lists logical volumes created from disks or volume groups, but no file systems have been create on these logical volumes.

Unused Disks/Volume Groups This report provides insight into wasted space on hosts. It displays the total volume group and disk capacity, along with used and available capacity.

Application Capacity & Utilization

Applications At Risk Identify applications that are at risk of running out of storage space.Over-Provisioned Applications Identify applications that are at risk of having over-provisioned storage—resulting in wasted

storage.Application Storage Dashboard This report essentially interrogates the application to identify what storage is free. The table

has three main sections of information: Application Storage, File System Storage, and Array Storage. Expand the application row to view details.

Chargeback and Billing

Chargeback By Host View usage and user-defined chargeback/billing by host.Chargeback Policy Capacity View chargeback policy capacity for RAID and LUNsCapacity At Risk

LUNs At Risk LUNs at risk are determined by evaluating current and projected usage.Over-Provisioned LUNs Over-provisioning leads to increased costs unless you reclaim the space. Since this report

shows over-provisioning, the list will show usage that has not reached the threshold.Hosts At Risk This report lists only the hosts that require your immediate attention. Use the host link to drill

down to particulars. Select a capacity threshold: Low, Warning, or Critical.Over-Provisioned Hosts Determine which hosts are over-provisioned. Reclaim the space before acquiring additional

storage.NetApp Aggregates at Risk For thin provisioning, this report lists host usage that is about to exceed the storage that was

promised.NetApp Volumes at Risk Lists thin-provisioned volumes that may be at risk of over-commitment

Virtualization Manager Reports DescriptionAdministration

VM Server Summary List the VM Servers, with CPU, Memory, Disk, and Datastore Usage. Drill down to specific VM details, such as VM Server Details and Physical Disk Utilization.

VM Summary View the list of Virtual Machines, including capacity usage and VM status. Drill down to view details, including Datastore and Logical Disk Utilization.

VM Files Summary View specific files associated with a VM. This report is key to identifying reclaimable storage.Storage Capacity & Utilization

Datastore Utilization Identify what storage is in use and where it is located. Link to details to view Extents and the corresponding Physical Disk details. Also, link to the array from which the storage has been provisioned.

Datastore Usage Breakdown View pie charts that represent the usage by file type, such as VMDK, VM not in Inventory, non-VM files, and free space.

Physical Disk Utilization List physical disks associated with VMs, along with Array and LUN mappings.Performance ReportsVM Performance Summary Report on CPU and Memory usage, enabling insight into storage access bottlenecks.VM Performance over Time Charts of CPU, Memory, Disk I/O Usage, and Disk Write Latency over time.Datastore Performance Summary Tabular list of datastores with disk I/O statistics, including read/write latency


Replication Manager Reports

Physical Disk Performance Summary

Tabular list of physical disks with I/O statistics, including read/write latency

Physical Disk Performance over Time

Charts of physical disk performance over time, with drilldowns to VM details

Forecast & PlanningVM Size Forecast View graphs that project growth, based on historical usageDatastore Capacity Forecast View average capacity and forecasted usage graphs for each Datastore.

Replication Manager Reports DescriptionSnapMirror Reports

SnapMirror Summary View a listing of the status of SnapMirror transactions. This report lists source-destination pairs, along with the most frequently used relevant metrics.

SnapMirror Schedule List the SnapMirror Schedules, showing error/success status.SnapMirror Status Display a bar chart for an at-a-glance view of the success/failure of SnapMirrors, based on the

last sampling of data. Drill down to the SnapMirror Summary.SnapMirror Data Transfer Display a bar chart representing the amount of data transferred from NetApp source to

destination systems.SnapMirror Volumes/QTrees at Risk

Track storage being consumed by SnapMirror Transactions and prevent usage from exceeding capacity.

SnapMirror Relationship Summary List the source-destination status, with base snapshots.Data Protection Dashboard List SnapMirror source paths with colored success/failure indicators that drilldown to details.SnapVault Reports

SnapVault Sec Configuration List primary and secondary paths, with success/failure statistics.SnapVault Summary View a list of SnapVault transactions, by destination location.SnapVault Schedule List the SnapVault schedules with array and volume information.SnapVault Status Display a bar chart for an at-a-glance view of SnapVault status, with drilldown access to

details.SnapVault Data Transfer Display a bar chart that represents the amount of data transferred.SnapVault Relationship Summary List source-destination pairs for SnapVault transactions.Data Protection Dashboard List SnapVault paths with colored success/failure indicators that drilldown to details.SnapVault QTrees at Risk List SnapVault QTrees that are at risk of exceeding available capacity.FlexClone ReportsFlexClone Summary List FlexClone transactions with Aggregate available capacity.

Aggregate Mirror ReportsAggregate Mirror Summary List Aggregate Mirror status.

Available Reports 9

Logging In/Off the PortalThe Portal allows more than one Administrator and User to be logged on simultaneously.The Portal works with the following browsers:

To log in to the Portal:

1. Do one of the following from your browser:• If your company hosts the Portal, go to http://aptareportal.mydomain.com.• If a third-party hosts your Portal, go to http://my.storageconsole.com.The Portal login window appears.

2. Type your email address and password, then click the Login button.

If this is your first time logging in to the Portal, your Administrator provided you a default password.

To log off the Portal:

Click on Logout in the upper right-hand corner of the Portal toolbar. The login page and a message appears, confirming that you’ve successfully logged off the Portal.

Browser Mac Windows Unix LinuxMicrosoft Internet Explorer 7.0+, 8.0+ xMozilla Firefox 2.0+, 3.0+ x x x xApple Safari 3.2+ x x

Table 1.2 Supported Browsers


http://my.storageconsole.com

Managing My ProfileWhile the Application Administrator has the responsibility of setting up login access, you can update certain other fields in your profile.

To update your profile:1. From the Portal toolbar, select Tools > My Profile.2. Modify any of the following fields:

• First name• Last name• Email• Work phone• Cell phone

Note: Your login ID can be updated only by the Application Administrator. To change your password, see Changing Your Login Password.

Managing My Profile 11

Changing Your Login PasswordIf you forget your password, contact your Application Administrator. Your administrator has the permissions to change any user’s password. Also, follow this procedure to simply change your password.The password must be a minimum of 7 characters and contain at least 1 non-alpha character. It is recommended that you create a strong password.

To assign or change a user password:

1. In the Portal’s toolbar, choose Tools > Change Password.

2. In the User Password pane, type the new user password, confirm the password, then click Save to update the password.


http://technet2.microsoft.com/windowsserver/en/library/e903f7a2-4def-4f5f-9480-41de6010fd291033.mspx?mfr=true

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\]]]]]]]]]]][=‘qqqe4r5t6y7u78i90op--[=\\APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 2Chapter 1Generating and Maintaining Reports

This chapter covers the following topics:• About the Report Designer• About Report Scope• Selecting Report Scope• Listing Server Groups• Searching for Servers• Report Designer Parameters• Generating Reports• Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports• Sorting Columns in Reports• Setting Refresh Intervals• Modifying Reports• Saving Reports• Deleting Reports• Searching for a Report

13

About the Report DesignerThe Report Designer tool enables you to specify parameters and then generate a report. To launch the Report Designer, find a report in the navigation pane at the left of the Portal window and then expand a menu group and click on any report template, as shown in the following figure.The Portal organizes reports into functional groups: Backup Manager, Capacity Manager, Virtualization Manager, and Replication Manager. These groups are represented by colored bars in the navigation pane. Click on the colored bar to expand the tree to view the available menu groups, report templates, and report instances.

To understand Report Designer, you need only understand a few basic report components, described in the following sections:• Menu Group• Report Template and Report Instance

Report Designer displays a pop-up window in which you can specify report criteria, as shown in the following example. See About Report Scope for details.


Backup Manager Scope SelectionFor Backup Manager reports, use the following procedure to modify the scope:In the Report Designer window, click Modify to launch the Client Selection window.

About the Report Designer 15

Capacity Manager Scope SelectionFor Capacity Manager reports, use the following procedure to modify the scope:In the Report Designer window, click Modify to launch the Client Selection window.


Virtualization Manager Scope SelectionThe Virtualization Manager reports enable a variety of mutually exclusive scope selections:• Datastores - Select specific VM storage locations for a report.• Hypervisors - Expand the list to select entities within the virtualized platform, such as Data

Centers and VMs.• Server Groups

About the Report Designer 17

Menu GroupA menu group is a folder that contains all of your report templates. There are several default menu groups, including Management Reports and SLA Reports. You cannot delete these default menu groups.

Report Template and Report Instance A report template provides a structure for generating a report based on parameters that you specify. The Portal provides many default report templates, such as Job Status Report and Job Duration report. You cannot change, rename, or delete any default report templates. However, you can create new report templates and you can generate reports from existing report templates. The reports that you generate from a report template are called report instances. You can create as many report instances as you want. A report instance is a “point in time” view of the current state of your data. Each time you launch a report instance, the most current information populates your browser window. You can save a report instance, which saves the scope and parameters that you specified—not the report output.

Units of Measure in ReportsFor certain reports, an Advanced option in the Report Designer enables the selection of the unit of measure—MBytes, GBytes, or TBytes.If you notice a discrepancy in the values reported by the Portal reports versus the values you see in the backup product itself, this is likely due to the conversion of the units of measure. Note that the Portal uses 1024 for the value of a KB.So, at first glance when comparing reports, the following may appear to be inaccurate:84,977,912.22 MB —> converted to GB —> 82,986.24 GB84,977,912.22/1024 = 82,986.24


About Report Scope When you generate a report, Report Designer prompts you to define the servers or a list of clients that you want included in the report scope. Report scope simply refers to the criteria that you specify to filter the data that’s included in a report.You can scope by the following filters:• Server Groups. Refers to the server group(s) and server sub-group(s) that you can choose,

which depends on the home group to which you belong.• Attributes. Refers to the attributes associated with a server group; for example, operating

system. For more information, go to the APTARE StorageConsole Application Administrator’s Guide.

• Clients. Select specific clients for a static report. A static report does not take into account changes in your network topology, so if you add clients to a network, you either have to explicitly include them in your report scope or add them to a server group. To ensure that clients are always included in reports, assign them to a server group.

When you generate a report, the Report Designer initiates a database query, based on the report scope that you specify. Since the nature of your IT environment is dynamic—that is, it’s not uncommon to add server groups and clients to your network—reports reflect the updates.Use the following guidelines to ensure that your reports include the data you expect to see:• If you add new server groups after you generate a report, the next time you generate this

same report, it will include different results. When you scope by server group or attributes, the Report Designer produces a dynamic report.

• If you add clients to your network, but do not assign them to a server group, then generate a report without including the new clients in your scope, you can be certain that the data for that client will not be in the report. This type of report scope produces a static report. However, if you add the client to a server group and this server group is part of the report scope, the report automatically includes report data for that client.

About Report Scope 19

Selecting Report ScopeYou can create static reports or dynamic reports. To create static reports, define your report scope based on a list of individual clients. To produce dynamic reports, define your report scope based on domain, server groups, and attributes.To learn about how report scope selects clients. Go to About Report Scope. For advanced report filtering, see Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports.

To select report scope:

1. In the Navigation pane, select a report to generate. For example: Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Status Summary

The Report Designer window pops up.2. From the Report Designer, go to the Scope pane and click Modify. The Client Selection

window launches.

3. Do one of the following:• Create a dynamic report. In the Server Groups tab, select the group of clients that you

want to include in your report:• Search for specific servers. See Searching for Servers in Report Designers.• If you want to begin by including all clients, select the entire domain—the top level

server group. Proceed to Step 4.• If you want to begin by including specific clients within a server group, select the

check box for that server group. Proceed to Step 4.


• Create a static report. Select a list of individual clients that you want to include in your report:

• In the Server Groups tab, drill down to each client’s server group and select the client’s check box; or

• Go to the Clients tab and create a list of clients based on attributes.4. To narrow your scope and filter the results based on attributes, select the attributes from the

Attributes tab.

5. Click OK. You’ve specified the report scope. Next Step

If necessary, continue specifying other report parameters, then click Generate to view the report that you designed.

Listing Server GroupsTypically, you generate reports for a specific server group or set of server groups. In addition, you may want to drilldown to a particular client within a server group. So, when you are defining the scope of a report, you need to understand the organization of the server groups in your domain. To search for a specific server, refer to Searching for Servers.To view the server groups in your Portal domain, use the following procedure.

1. In the Menu list at the left of the Portal window, expand Server Groups.

2. You can drill down to details for the following information:• Client - displays the Server Details report• Server - displays the Server Details report• Last Backup - displays the Job Details• Backups This Month - displays the Job Summary report

Note: The Backups this month value does not include failed jobs.

Listing Server Groups 21

Searching for ServersWhen you are selecting a scope in a Report Designer window, you may need to find and verify details about a particular server. To generate a list of servers, from the Portal toolbar, select:Tools > Search

Searching Considerations• Wildcard searches are supported, such as: a*. The asterisk is required for wildcard searches.• Search results may include servers that appear to be unrelated to the search, as host aliases

also are included in the resulting server list. Click on the server to view the Server Details Report, which lists Host Aliases.


Searching for Servers in Report DesignersFor reports that can be filtered by servers and server groups, the report designer offers a search capability, as shown in the following example.

Searching for Servers 23

Report Designer ParametersEach time you generate a report, the Report Designer presents you with report parameters that you select to tailor the output. For parameter details, see:• Backup Manager Primary Settings• Backup Manager Advanced Settings• Capacity Manager Primary Settings• Capacity Manager Advanced SettingsNote: Not all reports use all parameters. For example, the Tape Drive Usage and Forecast Report does not need to take into account specific backup events or status, so those options will not be displayed in the Report Designer window.

Backup Manager Primary Settings The availability of selections, options, and default values varies from report to report because not all selections and options apply to all reports.

• Time Period• Start Date / End Date• Scope• Group By• Media Status

• Event Type• Event Status• # of Consecutive Errors• Dynamic Report Start & End Times• Cascade into sub-groups

Time Period

The reporting time periods for this report. Your choices range from the last 12 hours to the last 7 years. The options for this parameter depend on the report.

Start Date / End Date

If you want a static report, specify start and end date in the date format: MM/DD/YYYY. If you want a dynamic report—that is, a report that changes as the underlying data changes—do not specify a start and end date, as the default always represents the current day.

Table 2.1 Backup Manager Primary Settings


Scope

Use this filter to specify what data will be included in a report.• By Server Group. Includes data from default and user-defined server

groups. For information about server groups, see the Application Administrator’s Guide.

• By Attribute. Includes data from default and user-defined attributes or characteristics. For information about attributes, go to the APTARE StorageConsole System Administrator’s Guide.

• By Clients. Includes data for only specific clients rather than data for server groups.

To learn more about the report scope, go to About Report Scope.

Event Type

The type of jobs you are interested in:• All Backup & Restore Events• All Backup Events• Full Backups• Incremental Backups• Restores

Group By

Use the drop-down list to specify how you want the data in the bar charts or tables to be grouped. The available options are dependent on the type of report. Some reports group by time, while others group data by either server, client, or policy.

Media Status

The Media Status parameter is included in the Tape Media Summary Report Designer. You can specify which media should be included in the report by selecting one of the following options: All Media, Expired Media, Available Media, In Use Media or Full Media.The default setting for this parameter is All Media.

Event Status

Applies to all backup event-driven reports. Select from the following event status options: • All Events• Successful Events• Warning Events• Failed Events

# of Consecutive Errors

Use this filter to exclude consecutive errors. This option comes in handy when troubleshooting by limiting the report to servers with excessive activity. Select a number from the drop-down list. Only sets of consecutive errors >= the specified number will be included in the report.


Report Designer Parameters 25

Backup Manager Advanced SettingsThe availability of selections, options, and default values varies from report to report because not all selections and options apply to all reports.

Dynamic Report Start & End Times

Provides the user with the ability to specify dynamic report start and end day and time. Simply specify the number of days before or after the current day as well as the time for both the start and end day and times to be used to generate the report.

Cascade into sub-groups

The report designer default is to cascade to all child sub-groups when generating the report. If you prefer to report ONLY on the server group you selected, then uncheck Cascade into sub-groups.

• Start Time / Finish Time• Time Zone• Parent Job Only• Backup Window

• Error Code Excludes• Ignore Retries• Job Types

Start Time / Finish Time

Enables you to instruct the application to use the event start or finish time as the include trigger when culling the events for inclusion within the time frame specified for the report.For example, if you only want to display events that occurred between 12AM and 6:30AM, then specify those times for the start and finish time parameters so that the application filters the events by those time constraints.Available in various backup/restore events reports.

Time ZoneEnables you to select a specific time zone to normalize the report by any time zone equivalent in the world. The default setting for this parameter is the time zone setting of the Management Server.

Parent Job Only

This option is available only in the Job Status Summary and Job Summary reports. For NetBackup, the Portal groups the jobs with the same parent-child relationship that NetBackup uses. Some customers prefer to see only the status of the parent jobs, so this option enables that selection.

Backup Window

Select a custom backup window to be applied to the report. Typically, backups begin at the end of the business day, but they do not finish before the end of the day—thereby skewing the success statistics for the day. To more accurately reflect backup SLA metrics, you can re-define a day with a custom backup window. These custom backup windows are defined by the StorageConsole System Administrator.

Table 2.2 Backup Manager Advanced Settings



Error Code Excludes

Check the Set Error Excludes box and the application will dynamically generate an Error Code ID/Descriptions Dialogue where you can check all the error codes that need to be excluded from the report. Then, click Accept and all the codes will auto-populate the Exclude Id text box. Any event which exited with an error code specified in the exclude list will not be included in the resulting report.Note: This functionality currently is available only for the Consecutive Errors By Client Report.

Ignore Retries

Check this box to indicate that retries for backup jobs should not be incorporated in the statistics shown.

Job TypesRefers to the type of backup job. Each backup product has its own set of job types.

Table 2.2 Backup Manager Advanced Settings


Capacity Manager Primary SettingsThe availability of the selections, options within the selections, and default values for the options vary from report to report because not all selections and options apply to all reports.

• Storage Arrays• Scope• Start Date / End Date

• Threshold• Group By• Cascade into sub-groups

Storage Arrays Lists all the storage arrays that the Data Collectors identified.

Scope

Use this filter to specify what data will be included in a report.• By Server Group. Includes data from default and

user-defined server groups. For information about server groups, see the Application Administrator’s Guide.

• By Attribute. Includes data from default and user-defined attributes or characteristics. For information about attributes, go to the APTARE StorageConsole System Administrator’s Guide.

• By Clients. Includes data for only specific clients rather than data for server groups.

To learn more about the report scope, go to About Report Scope.

Start Date / End Date

If you want a static report, specify start and end date in the date format: MM/DD/YYYY. If you want a dynamic report—that is, a report that changes as the underlying data changes—do not specify a start and end date, as the default always represents the current day.

Threshold

For Capacity At Risk reports only, limit the report output to a threshold category:• Low • Warning• Critical

Table 2.3 Capacity Manager Primary Settings


Capacity Manager Advanced SettingsThe availability of the selections, options within the selections, and default values for the options vary from report to report because not all selections and options apply to all reports.

Group By

Use the drop-down list to specify how you want the data in the bar charts or tables to be grouped. The available options are dependent on the type of report. Some reports group by time, while others group data by either server, client, or policy.

Cascade into sub-groups

The report designer default is to cascade to all child sub-groups when generating the report. If you prefer to report ONLY on the server group you selected, then uncheck Cascade into sub-groups.

CapacityEnables you to specify the output in Terabytes, Gigabytes, or Megabytes. For consistency, consider using the same capacity for all reports.

Table 2.4 Capacity Manager Advanced Settings

Table 2.3 Capacity Manager Primary Settings


Generating ReportsThe default reports meet most users’ needs. However, if the default reports do not include the fields that you need, create a custom report. See “Using Report Template Designer” on page 62..

To generate a report based on a default report:

Before You

Begin

Identify the report that represents the reporting data that you want. View the list of reports in the report group folders in the Navigation pane.

1. From the Navigation pane, select the report that you want to generate. The Report Designer launches.

The Report Designer window is unique to the report you are generating, displaying only the parameters that are relevant to the specific report.

2. Specify the report parameters, then click Generate. Report Designer renders the report in the Content pane and displays the Toolbar from which you can perform other tasks.

If there is no data on which to report, a report will not be generated. Note: When the Portal determines that a large amount of data has been returned for display, the resulting report window provides paging links: Previous and Next.

Next Step

After generating a report you can do a few things:• Save the report. Go to Saving Reports.• Schedule an automated report based on the report you generated.Go to “Scheduling Emailed

Reports” on page 46.• Instantly email the report to yourself or others. Go to “Emailing Reports” on page 45.• Export the saved report in one of the following common formats: HTML or CSV.• Share a report to a message group.


Advanced Filtering for Tabular ReportsIn addition to the filtering that is achieved in the Report Designer window, table-formatted reports can be further filtered on Rows and/or Columns, using the following procedures.Note: To optimize performance, be sure to use the filtering that’s available in the Report Designer before using any advanced filtering.

Filter Report RowsWhen you filter rows, you define the criteria for the data rows you want to see in the report. Drop-down lists enable selection from the available columns. Then, you supply the operator—such as equals or does not contain—and a value for that column. Up to 4 criteria selections can be joined to form the filter.Filtering Limitations: Filtering on exact decimal values may produce inconsistent results, as reports display rounded values of higher-precision data. For example, a filter of MBytes equals 150.95 will return rows with rounded values. To configure a filter that more precisely narrows the content, include additional row-filtering criteria with > and < logic to limit the data that is displayed.Note: Reports can have both row and column filters applied.1. Generate a table report, such as the Job Summary or the VM Summary report.

2. In the output window of the report, right-click select Filter.

3. In the first drop-down list, select a column name.

4. In the second drop-down list, select an operator.

Operator Descriptionequals1 Filters rows where the value of the associated column is equal to

the value entered. The column can be of the type Number, Date or String.

not equal1 Filters rows where the value of the associated column is not equal to the value entered. The column can be of the type Number, Date or String.

greater than Filters rows where the value of the associated column is greater to the value entered. The column can be of the type Number, Date, Duration, and File Size.

less than Filters rows where the value of the associated column is smaller than the value entered. The column can be of the type Number, Date, Duration, and File Size.

greater than or equal to Filters rows where the value of the associated column is greater than or equal to the value entered. The column can be of the type Number, Date, Duration, and File Size.

less than or equal to Filters rows where the value of the associated column is smaller than or equal to the value entered. The column can be of the type Number, Date, Duration, and File Size.

Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports 31

1 -is case insensitive. 2 –reference: http://java.sun.com/j2se/1.4.2/docs/api/java/util/regex/Pattern.html

• When filtering on Indicator Lights, as shown in the following example, filter on the color: Red, Yellow, Green, or Gray.

• To combine several expressions into one filter, select an and or or operator from the drop-down list at the end of the row.

• When filtering on Dates, refer to the above table to determine which columns can be filtered on date. Be aware that filtering on Dates needs to be carefully designed in order to avoid degradation of performance. Date criteria can be specified in the following formats:

5. Click OK to re-generate the report with the filter applied.

contains1 Filters rows where the value entered is present anywhere in the value of the associated column. Example: If the column value is “rattle” and the value entered is “rat” or “at” the row will be displayed. The column can only be of the type String.

does not contain1 Filters rows where the value entered is not present anywhere in the value of the associated column. The column only can be of the type String.

Includes Filters rows where the value of the associated column is equal to any of the comma-separated values entered. Example: If you enter a value “chair, table, desk” and the column value is “table” the row will be displayed. The column can be of the type Number, String, Duration, and File Size.

Excludes Filters rows where the value of the associated column is not equal to any of the comma-separated values entered. The column can be of the type Number, String, Duration, and File Size.

matches regular expression Filters rows where the value of associated column matches the regular expression2 entered. The column can only be of the type String.

does not match regular expression

Filters rows where the value of associated column does not match the regular expression2 entered. The column can only be of the type String.

mm/dd/yyyy Specified date

Now Current date and time

Today Current day

+nd-nd

Enables a variable time frame (plus or minus a number of days)For example: +2d

This criteria can be combined with Today.For example: Today-5d


The report will now contain a filter applied link, enabling access to the defined filter. When you save this report instance, the filter is saved with it.

Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports 33

Filter Report ColumnsWhen you filter columns, you check the columns that you want to appear in the report and uncheck the columns that you want displayed.Note: Reports can have both row and column filters applied.1. Generate a table report, such as the Job Summary or the VM Summary report.

2. In the output window of the report, right-click select Filter.

3. In the Report Filtering window, click the Columns tab to view the list of columns.

All of the columns initially will be checked.4. Uncheck the columns that you want to remove from the report.

5. Click OK to re-generate the report with the filter applied.

The report will now contain a filter applied link, enabling access to the defined filter. When you save this report instance, the filter is saved with it.

Sorting Columns in ReportsFor reports that display data in tables, you can easily change the order that data is displayed in columns.

To sort columns in a table report:

• From the report, click on any of the table headings to sort the data for that heading in ascending order.

• From the report, click the heading a second time to sort by descending order.• To return to the report’s original order, click the Customize button and Re-Generate the

report.

Setting Refresh IntervalsOnce you have generated and saved a report, you may want to periodically refresh the data that is displayed. The following characteristics apply to refresh intervals:• A report or dashboard first must be saved before a refresh interval can be configured.• Available refresh intervals include: 3, 5, 10, or 15 minutes.• A report that is refreshing will have its last refresh time displayed in the tab of the window.• Refresh intervals are not persistent—that is, once a report is closed, its refresh setting is

cleared.• To cancel a report that is refreshing, simply close the tab.


To set a report or dashboard to refresh its display every few minutes, use the following procedure.

1. Generate the report and save it.

A report must be saved in order to have the refresh capability associated with it.

2. Right-click within the content of the report window to display a context menu.

3. Select Set Refresh Interval from the context menu.

4. Set the refresh rate to 3, 5, 10 or 15 minutes and click OK.

Modifying ReportsYou can modify the parameters of a report instance. After you generate a report, the Report Designer renders the report in the browser window, along withe a report toolbar from which you can choose to customize (modify) the report instance.

To modify a report instance:

1. Click on the report instance that you want to modify. The Report Designer renders the report and displays a Toolbar in the Content pane.

2. From the Toolbar, click Customize.

3. Change the report parameters, then click Re-Generate.

See Saving Reports for details on saving report instances.

Modifying Reports 35

Saving ReportsRecall that you only can save a report instance—that is, a report that you generated, based on one of a default Report Templates. When you save a report instance, you are saving the definition and parameters, not the report output. Because the Report Designer saves the reporting parameters only, not the actual report data, you do not need to worry about running out of disk space. Each time you launch a report instance, the report’s data refreshes.Note: To capture report output into a saved file, use the export feature, Exporting Reports.

When you generate a report, the Report Designer renders the report in the Content pane and then displays the Toolbar from which you can choose to save the report instance. When you save a report, the report instances’ parameters are saved in the Reporting Database. Once you create a report instance, it remains in the Reporting Database until you delete it.

To save a report instance:

Before You

Begin

Generate the report if you have not already done so. See “Generating Reports” on page 30..

1. From the report, in the Content pane, click Save.

2. In the Save Report dialog box, specify a descriptive report name, then click Save.

The Report Designer saves the report instance under the report template (folder) in which you created the report.

To rename or copy a report instance:

1. Generate the saved report instance.

2. Click Replace to overwrite the current instance or Copy to create a copy of the instance. The copy can have a duplicate name or you can modify the name (recommended) before copying the instance.

Next Step

If you intend to access this report instance often, consider adding it to your My Reports or to your dashboard. Go to “Creating Dashboards” on page 56 or “Adding Reports to Dashboards” on page 57.


Deleting ReportsYou cannot delete default reports, but you can delete report instances that you created based on a default report. When you delete a report instance, you permanently delete it from the Reporting Database.

To delete a report instance:

1. From the Navigation pane, right-click on the report instance that you want to delete.

2. From the shortcut menu, click Delete Saved Report and then confirm your selection.

Searching for a ReportUse the Report Finder to locate a report. Report Finder searches both saved report instances and default report templates.

To search for a report:

1. From the Navigation pane, locate the Report Finder search bar.

2. In the search box, type in one or more keywords represented in the report name, then click Find. A list of reports matching your keywords appears in the Navigation pane.

3. To return the Navigation pane to its original list, click Clear.

Report Finder supports a partial-name search. For example, if you’re looking for all reports related to service-level agreements, you can type SLA to list all relevant reports. Note that if you establish a standard report-naming convention, this type of search will be more fruitful.

Deleting Reports 37


APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 3Chapter 2Distributing, Sharing, Scheduling, Alerting

This chapter covers the following topics:• Exporting Reports• Scheduling Exported Reports• Emailing Reports• Scheduling Emailed Reports• Scheduled Reports Administration• Deleting Scheduled Reports• Alerting• Sharing Reports• Technical Community Sharing• Adding Notes to Backup Job Details

39

Exporting Reports If you need to make the report data available to an external application or just save it as a hardcopy report, you can export a report to a file. The date for the report will be the date and time that the report was generated. The date and time are derived from the Portal Server’s time zone, which was determined when your administrator installed the Portal.Note: The exporting procedures described in this section should not be confused with exporting a Custom Report definition (created in the Report Template Designer). This information can be found in Exporting/Importing Report Templates.

To export report data or schedule an export report run:

Before You

Begin

Generate the report if you have not already done so. Go to “Generating Reports” on page 30.

1. Save the generated report as a report instance and then click on the saved instance to re-generate it.

2. From the report that you want to export, at the top right of the content pane, click Export.

3. In the Export Report dialog box, choose the format.

The comma-separated-values (csv) and Excel formats are intended for tabular reports; exporting other types of reports to these formats may result in files that do not exactly match the report.

4. Click either Export Now or Schedule.

Export the report as

Note: Dashboards can be exported only in HTML format.• CSV (.csv). Use this format if you want to export

tabular data to a spreadsheet or a database application such as Microsoft Access.

• Excel (.xls). Similar to the CSV export, this file supports MS Excel-specific features.

• XML (.xml). Use this format to access the web page components.

• PDF (.pdf). This read-only file lends itself to easy distribution and printing.

• HTML (.html). Use this format if you want to export this data as a web page.

Note: The Export-to-HTML process produces a .zip file with all the necessary files. Extract the files and then click on report.html to display the report. Depending on your browser’s settings, the file will be saved to your default location (typically, Desktop), or a dialog box launches and requires that you specify the location for the file.


http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comma-separated_values

Note: The Schedule option is available only in saved report instances, as only saved reports can be scheduled.If you choose Export Now, you will be prompted to complete the operation—open or save file.If you choose Schedule, you will be prompted to configure several settings, as shown in Scheduling Exported Reports.

Exporting Reports 41

Scheduling Exported ReportsWhen you schedule a report to be exported on a regular basis, you must first configure a number of settings.

See Expression Builder for details.


Use the following table to configure a schedule:

Export

To Schedule the report to run on a regular basis, you must select one of the following options from the Export drop-down list:• On a defined schedule - Master schedules can be configured

and then applied to reports. Modifications to a master schedule will automatically be applied to all the reports associated with that master schedule. See the Application Administrator’s Guide.

• Hourly - Select 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12 hours.• Daily - At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time.• Weekly -

• On every. Check the day(s) on which the report will run.• At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time.

• Monthly - • On the. Select the day on which the report will run.• At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time.

The Portal can run the same report multiple times in a single day.

Export to the path:*

This feature enables you to deploy reports that are viewed by a large audience on a regular basis.Specify a path where the output will be saved, for example, a web server directory. You can append sub-directory information to the beginning of the default path name (/opt/aptare/portal/export). Then, click Validate to ensure that your path specification will work.Note: The scheduler will substitute the underscore character for invalid characters.FOR ADVANCED USERS: In some cases (for example, Managed Services Providers with hundreds of managed server groups), you may want to export to specific server group or report directories. Rather than configure each of these separately, you can use the following variables in the path specification to generate an individual report for each instance of the variable:

${serverGroup}For example: /opt/aptare/export/${serverGroup}/doc

${reportName}

To over-write/replace files each time the reports are exported, use the variables: ${day}, ${month}, ${year}, ${hour}, ${minute}where the day, month, year, hour, and minute are represented as 2-digits, such as 02.

Exporting Reports 43

Generate reports for:

Choose one of the following:• Existing scope - Creates a single report based on the report’s

scope.• Matching server groups - Creates multiple reports, based on

the list that results from the Expression Builder. See Match server groups on: below.

Note: Dashboards cannot be exported for multiple server groups.

Expression BuilderMatch server groups on:

You can specify a regular expression to be used for searching for server group with pattern matching. Then, click Builder to launch the Expression Builder window where you can Evaluate the regular expression to see which server groups are selected.Examples:.*NetBackup.* - the period specifies any character; the asterisk specifies zero or more of the preceding element.

[abc] - simple alpha character match[a-zA-Z] - any alpha character in upper or lowercase[^abc] - any character except a, b, or c

Note: The Expression Builder is case-sensitive.

For additional regular expression details and examples, see: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression


http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression

Emailing Reports After you generate a report and the Report Designer renders the report in the Content pane, the Portal displays the Toolbar from which you can choose to instantly email the report. You can email a report to yourself, other individuals, or a distribution list. The Email Report feature comprises both the email function and the report scheduling function. If you want a report to be emailed on a regular basis, see Scheduling Emailed Reports.

To email a report:

Before You

Begin

Generate the report if you have not already done so. Go to “Generating Reports” on page 30.

1. From the report that you want to email, at the right of the content pane, locate the report toolbar and click Email.

The buttons shown above are available only in saved report instances. A subset of these options is available in unsaved reports.

2. The Email Report dialog box will prompt you for parameters.

The Schedule option is available only for saved report instances.3. In the Email Report dialog box, specify your delivery settings:

Emailing Reports 45

4. Only saved reports can be scheduled for delivery on a regular basis (see Scheduling Emailed Reports). Click Email Now for reports that have not been saved or if you simply want to email a saved report immediately.

Scheduling Emailed ReportsWhen you schedule a report, you actually are configuring it to run and be emailed at regular intervals. To schedule a report, you must first save it. Then, after you generate the saved report, you can configure it to run and be emailed on a regular basis.

To email a report at regularly scheduled intervals:

Before You

Begin

Generate the report if you have not already done so, and then save it. Go to “Generating Reports” on page 30.

1. From the saved report that you want to schedule, at the right of the content pane, locate the report toolbar and click Email.

The Email Report dialog box will prompt you for additional parameters.

EmailWhen you email a report, you do so instantly—Now. However, you also can schedule a saved report, as described in “Scheduling Emailed Reports” on page 46. The other options in this list are relevant to scheduling report emails at regular intervals.

Email as

• CSV (.csv). Use this format if you want to export tabular data to a spreadsheet or a database application such as Microsoft Access.

• Excel (.xls). Similar to the CSV export, this file supports MS Excel-specific features.

• PDF (.pdf). This read-only file lends itself to easy distribution and printing.

• HTML (.html). Use this format if you want to export this data as a web page.

• Image (.gif). Use this image format as a read-only choice.Email to Provide a comma-separated list of email addresses.Subject Specify an email subject if you want to override the report title.

Use Live links

Sometimes reports contain hyperlinks. When you email a report that contains links, these links remain active unless the report instance no longer appears in the Reporting Database. For security purposes, you might not want the links active, in the event that a report user becomes unauthorized to view the report in the future.


http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comma-separated_values

Emailing Reports 47

2. In the Email Report dialog box, specify your delivery settings:

Email

To Schedule the report to run on a regular basis, you must select one of the following options from the Email drop-down list: Defined Schedule, Hourly, Daily, Weekly, or Monthly.

• On a defined schedule - Master schedules can be configured and then applied to reports. Modifications to a master schedule will automatically be applied to all the reports associated with that master schedule. See the Application Administrator’s Guide.

• Hourly - Select 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12 hours.• Daily - At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time.• Weekly -

• On every. Check the day(s) on which the report will run.• At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time.

• Monthly - • On the. Select the day on which the report will run.• At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time.

The Portal can run the same report multiple times in a single day.Email as Currently, the only available option is HTML.Email to Provide a comma-separated list of email addresses.

Email if emptyThis option is available only when you are scheduling a tabular report to be emailed at regular intervals. Sometimes reports might not have any data. If you don’t want to email empty reports, choose No.


Scheduled Reports AdministrationThe scheduled reports that you can access depend on your user type: • If you are an Administrator, you can view your scheduled reports and all users’ scheduled

reports.• If you are not an Administrator, you can view your scheduled reports and those that belong to

other users in your home group.

From the Portal toolbar, choose Report > My Scheduled Reports.

See Expression Builder for details.Note: The Scheduled Reports Administration options will differ depending on how the report was scheduled, either as an email or a file export. Refer to Scheduling Emailed Reports and Scheduling Exported Reports for details.

Scheduled Reports Administration 49

Deleting Scheduled ReportsScheduled reports can be deleted by first viewing the list of scheduled reports and then deleting selected reports.

To delete a scheduled report:

1. From the Portal toolbar, choose Report > My Scheduled Reports.

A list of scheduled reports appears in the Scheduled Reports Administration window.2. Use the typical Ctrl-click and Shift-click mouse functions to select reports and then click

Delete.


AlertingUse the alerting feature to notify you when a tabular report has been populated with data. For example, save a Job Summary report for Failed Events and then configure an alert for this report. The Portal will check, according to the schedule you select, for a report that contains data.An alert can be delivered via the following mechanisms, described in detail later in this section:• Email• Script• SNMP• Native log

Configuring an Alert for a Tabular Report InstanceAlerting can be configured for any report that contains a single table.Use the following procedure to configure an alert for a report.

1. Save a report instance.

2. Generate the saved instance.

3. Right-click in the report window to launch the Alerting window.

4. Use the following table to configure an alert:

Alerting 51

5. Click OK to save the alert configuration.

6. To view the alerts, select Report > My Scheduled Reports. For details on managing alerts in the Scheduled Reports list, see Scheduled Reports Administration.

Schedule an Alert

To Schedule a report to be checked for alerts on a regular basis, you must select one of the following options from the drop-down list:• On a defined schedule - Master schedules can be configured

and then applied to reports. Modifications to a master schedule will automatically be applied to all the reports associated with that master schedule. See the Application Administrator’s Guide.

• Hourly - Select 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12 hours.• Daily - At: hour/minute. Select a specific time.• Weekly -

• On every. Check the day(s) on which the report will be checked.

• At: hour/minute. Select a specific time.• Monthly -

• On the. Select the day on which the report will be checked.

• At: hour/minute. Select a specific time.

The Portal can check the same report multiple times in a single day.

Email Check the box and provide a comma-separated list of email addresses.

Script

The user-created script needs to reside in: /opt/aptare/user_scripts

Check the box and enter a shell script name (UNIX). If a path name is included, it will be appended to the above path. For example, filter a report to include only the columns that will supply values to your ticketing system. The script should include variables that match the report columns so that the values can be passed on to your ticketing system.

SNMP

When you check this box, the Port, Community string, and Management servers fields will be populated from the configured defaults. To override the defaults, overwrite any or all of the three SNMP fields.Administrators: To configure SNMP default values, see Adding/Configuring a Domain in the Application Administrator’s Guide.

Native Log When this box is checked, a log entry is written to the OS-specific log: either the Windows event log or the UNIX/Linux syslog.


Sharing Reports You cannot share report templates, but you can share saved report instances. This procedure assumes that you already created and saved the report that you want to share. You can share a report with any number of users or user groups, however, the users must be part of a group.

To share a report:

1. From the report that you want to share, at the right of the content pane, locate the report toolbar and click Share.

A pop-up window presents you with a list of users and groups.2. Check any number of users or user groups.

3. Check the shared report scope:• Actual selected scope - When this option is selected, users may be able to access data

that is not in their home group.• User’s home group - This option limits access to data within the user’s home group. For

example, a Managed Services Provider may create a report and share it with multiple clients in different home groups. These users will only be able to access the data for their specific home group.Note: Custom reports, created with the Report Template Designer, always are restricted to the user’s home group.

4. Click Share.

To access reports that you shared with others:

From the Portal toolbar, choose Report > My Shared Reports.

To access reports that others shared with you:

From the Portal Navigation pane at the left of the window, click on the Shared Reports menu group.

Technical Community SharingA Community News Group offers a forum for sharing not only product news, but tips, questions, and strategies for using various products and reports. In addition, Report Template Designer SQL queries are posted in the forum’s Report Exchange.The Forum is accessible in the following ways:

• In the Portal: Help > Forum• URL in browser: http://newsgroup.storageconsole.com

Sharing Reports 53

Adding Notes to Backup Job DetailsNotes associated with backup job details enable you to fulfill compliance audit requirements. When a backup job fails, you can use notes to document remediation steps taken.You can attach a note to a backup job’s detail. You can use notes to:• Specify the cause of a failed job, and how you or a third party resolved the problem.• Provide an audit trail.• Share information with others.

For details about notes, see the Job Details Report. Also, see Example of Listing Jobs With Notes.


APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 4Chapter 2Organizing Reports

This chapter covers the following topics:• Task Overview: Organizing Reports• Creating Dashboards• Adding Reports to Dashboards• Deleting Reports from Dashboards• Adding Reports to a Custom Menu Group• Creating a Custom Menu Group• Changing Your Home Page

Task Overview: Organizing ReportsSo that you can easily retrieve your reports, consider using the following features to organize your reports:• Dashboards• My Reports• Custom Menu Group• Home Page Setup

To organize your reports, perform the following sequence of steps: Task For Instructions1. If you have reports that you need to access daily

or throughout the day, create dashboards and add reports to those dashboards.

• Creating Dashboards• Adding Reports to Dashboards

2. If you have reports that you need to access regularly, add those reports to My Reports.

• Adding Reports to a Custom Menu Group

3. Organize your reports into logical groupings by creating custom menu groups.

• Creating a Custom Menu Group

Task Overview: Organizing Reports 55

Creating DashboardsDashboards provide easy access to your reports. A dashboard is a canvas to which you can drag and drop reports. Consider creating a dashboard to contain reports that you need to access regularly and quickly. More importantly, use dashboards to view multiple scenarios simultaneously. The Portal provides several default dashboards, and you can easily create your own.Use dashboards to combine multiple reports into one view:• To monitor running jobs for three different backup servers, run each independent report and

then group them into a single dashboard.• To troubleshoot a particular backup problem, you can gather data from multiple reports in

one view.

Dashboard Example

By correlating data from multiple reports, you can determine if your storage units are functioning properly. 1. Using the Real Time Library and Drive Status report, you can determine if drives are

available.

2. Then, in the Running and Queued Jobs Summary, you can see what jobs are currently running.

If there are jobs in the queue for a storage unit, and there are also drives available within a storage unit, something may be preventing the queued jobs from moving to the running status.

Note: If you need to access specific reports regularly and quickly, but do not need to view these reports simultaneously because the reports are independent of each other, simply add these reports to your My Reports menu group instead.

To create a dashboard:

1. From the Portal toolbar, choose Report > New Dashboard. The New Dashboard dialog box appears.

You also can create a new dashboard by right-clicking in any part of the Portal window (even within a report) and then selecting New Dashboard.

2. Generate each report that you want to be included in the dashboard you are developing.

3. Once all of the reports are generated, click on the tab of the New Dashboard that you started.

4. Click and drag the tab of each report that you want to place into the dashboard. These reports will become “portlets” within the dashboard.

You’ll notice as you drag the report into the dashboard, a blank grayed-out pane appears before the report docks in the dashboard. Once the portlets are placed in a dashboard, you can re-position them by dragging them to a new position.

Add the relevant reports to your dashboard. Go to “Adding Reports to Dashboards” on page 57.


Adding Reports to DashboardsYou can add report instances that you create to a personal dashboard. There is no limit to the number of reports that you can add to a personal dashboard. Each time you add a report to your dashboard, the reports appear side by side in the same window pane. Note: A report that has been generated as a result of a drilldown in another report cannot be saved or added to a dashboard.

To add a report to a new dashboard:

1. From the report, right-click on the chart and choose New Dashboard.

2. In the New Dashboard text box, type the name of the dashboard and click Create.

To add reports to an existing dashboard:

1. Generate the dashboard, as shown in the previous procedure.

2. From the Navigation pane, click on the report that you want to add to your dashboard and generate that report.

3. Go to the tab of the report at the top of the window and drag the report to your Dashboard menu group. This report will become a “portlet” within the dashboard.

Dashboard Example

Adding Reports to Dashboards 57

To add saved reports to an existing dashboard:

1. Create a new dashboard or open an existing dashboard.

2. Grab the saved report name from the menu list at the left of the Portal window and drag it into the dashboard, dropping it into place when you see a gray rectangle, as shown in the following example:

Deleting Reports from DashboardsAs you use your custom-designed dashboards, you may find that some reports aren’t relevant to the context that you’ve created.

To remove a report from a dashboard:

From the dashboard, right-click on the report portlet that you want to remove, then click Remove Portlet From Dashboard.


Adding Reports to a Custom Menu GroupIf you need to access specific and unrelated reports regularly and quickly, simply add these saved report instances to your My Reports menu group or a Custom Menu group (see Creating a Custom Menu Group). Both custom report templates and saved report instances can be placed into this group. This section describes the process of adding saved report instances to My Reports.

To add reports to My Reports or a custom menu group:

1. Click on the report instance and drag it on top of the My Reports or custom menu group.

When you drag a report to the My Reports menu group, place the report name on top of the menu group label before dropping it into the group.

When you place a saved report instance into this menu group, the menu item simply points to the actual report instance. Therefore, if you delete the saved report instance, it automatically will be removed from My Reports or the custom menu group.

Creating a Custom Menu GroupOnce you have accumulated several saved report instances and report templates, you may find that you can better organize them by creating your own menu groups within the My Reports group.

To create a Custom Menu Group in the My Reports group:

1. Right-click on top of My Reports and select New Menu Group.

2. Drag saved report instances and drop them onto the name of this Custom Menu Group.

3. You can right-click and take the following actions:

Adding Reports to a Custom Menu Group 59

Changing Your Home PageThe Home page is associated with a User and it is displayed when the user logs in. the Portal ships with a default home page, however, each user can set a different report as his home page. To display your home page:From the Portal Toolbar, select Report > Go To My Homepage.To change your home page:From the report, right-click on the chart or table, then choose Set As My Homepage.

In the top left of the window, you’ll see the status of this action: Homepage set...


5Chapter 2Custom Reports

This chapter covers the following topics:• Using Report Template Designer• Creating a Custom Report Template• Configure Report Designer Components• Specify the SQL Query• Sample Queries• Using Functions in Queries• Format the Output• Advanced Report Template Options - Drilldowns• Exporting/Importing Report Templates

About Custom ReportsThe Portal comes packaged with a set of default report templates. You can customize these Backup Manager and Capacity Manager templates in a number of ways:• narrow the report scope to specific server groups• modify parameters, such as the time period or event type.

After you have customized a default report, you can save it with its new parameters for on-going use. See About the Report Designer for details.In addition to customizing default report templates, you can create your own dashboards to combine several reports into one view. See Creating Dashboards for details.Once you’ve become familiar with the default reports and also the types of data collected, you may want to design reports that serve your unique reporting needs. See Using Report Template Designer for details.

About Custom Reports 61

Using Report Template Designer Use the Report Template Designer to create custom reports. To access custom reports created by other StorageConsole users, go to the Report Exchange section of the Community Forum: Help > ForumThis section includes details for the following Report Template Designer options and features:• Specify the SQL Query• Date Range• Server Groups and Client Scope• Custom Text Fields• Static Custom Combo Box • Query Custom Combo Box• Using Functions in Queries• Format the Output• Advanced Report Template Options - Drilldowns• Export a Report Template and Import a Report Template• Sample Queries

To create a custom report template:From the Portal toolbar, select Report > Template Designer.

The initial display of the Report Template Designer window begins with the Report Designer components. In this window, you can either:• Select components to be used to construct the report template.• Configure components to customize the way they are presented in the Report Template. See Configure

Report Designer Components.


To navigate the Report Template Designer, use either the tabs at the top of the window, or click Next at the bottom of the window.

Report Designer

Using the checkboxes, specify which parameters you want the user to specify in the Report Designer window, when the report is generated. • Date Range• Time Period - See Date Range for particulars.• Server Groups and Client Scope - See Server Groups and Client Scope.• Custom Text Fields - See Custom Text Fields for a description and

example.• Static Custom Combo Box - See Static Custom Combo Box for details.• Query Custom Combo Box - See Query Custom Combo Box for details.

To customize any of the above options, see Configure Report Designer Components.After you complete the selections within the tabbed Report Designer window, click on Next to go to the Query window where you will Specify the SQL Query.

Query The Query provides a window in which you must type your SQL statement. In addition, a list of valid database views and fields can be used to create your select statement. When you click Validate, the Report Designer checks your SQL statement for valid syntax before you can exit the designer. See Specify the SQL Query.

Using Report Template Designer 63

Formatting To format the output for a report template, select the information that you want included in the report, as well as the report output style—Table, Bar Chart, or Pie Chart. See Format the Output.

Save & Share

Save and share custom report templates with others. You can select individual users or groups, and also the menu group in which it will appear. Once you have saved a report template, you can edit the template. See Advanced Report Template Options - Drilldowns.


Creating a Custom Report TemplateThe Report Template Designer supports select statements. You cannot specify UPDATE, DROP, ALTER, or CREATE statements. After creating a Custom SQL report, it can be saved and shared for future use. When you save the report, you can select the report group under which it will appear in the Navigation pane.Using the Report Template Designer, take the following steps to create custom reports for your environment:• Configure Report Designer Components• Specify the SQL Query• Format the Output

Configure Report Designer ComponentsWhen you create a Custom Report, you can provide the user with a Report Designer interface, similar to the out-of-the box StorageConsole reports. Then, each time a report instance is generated from the Report Template, the user can select parameters to be used for report generation.

Date RangeConfigure this component to provide the time with the date range. Choose Yes or No to specify if the time will be shown along with the date range.

Server Groups and Client ScopeThis Report Designer component enables you to customize how the report will display the server groups’ data.

Use this configuration to specify if the cascade to sub-groups option is available and, if available, the default setting—Checked or Unchecked.

Creating a Custom Report Template 65

Custom Text FieldsThis Report Designer option broadens the capabilities of the custom report query. In the Report Template Designer, a user can define fields that then can be substituted into a query. When the report is generated, the Report Designer window presents the fields that can be selected, thus providing dynamic input for the report instance.This option enables you to create three free-form text fields, where you can specify a field that you want to use in your query. For example, you might enter Host Name, so that when you form the query, you can specify a host name to be inserted into the query.

Example

The following steps illustrate the advantage of Custom Text Fields.1. In the Report Template Designer, select the Custom Text Fields component and click

Configure.

2. In the Custom Text Fields configuration window, define a field named Host ID and click OK.

3. To use this newly configured Custom Text Field, be sure to select the checkbox.

4. In the Query window, enter the following SQL query by typing a partial statement and then double-clicking to select fields:


select * from aps_v_host_volume where host_id > ${freeText1}

This query can be constructed by combining typing with double-clicking selections in the window, as shown in the following example:

The resulting query will be:select * from aps_v_host_volume where aps_v_host_volume.host_id < ${freeText1}

5. Click Validate Query.

6. In the Formatting window, select all the fields for a table.

7. Save the report template with a name and a menu group.

8. Generate the report from this report template and in its Report Designer window, provide a value for the Host ID field. This value will be passed to the query.


Static Custom Combo BoxThe Report Designer Static Combo Box component enables the flexibility of offering the selection of various characteristics when the report is generated—similar to the way the out-of-the-box reports handle options, such as Event Type or Job Type. A Combo Box becomes available in the Report Designer, enabling a user to select items from a drop-down list.Specify a heading, along with a list of values that will be displayed as a drop-down selection.

To include a blank or no choice option, specify the list of values in the form:,option 1,option 2

If this no choice option is selected when the report is generated, an empty string will be passed to the SQL expression.


Example of a Combo Box1. Create a Custom Combo Box to enable the user to select all servers for a particular Make:

2. This Combo Box can be used in a report template query, such as:select * from apt_v_server where apt_v_server.make = '${freeCombo}'

Note: In this example, the Combo Box variable is a string, so it must be enclosed in single straight quotes to be evaluated as a text field, as shown in the above example.

3. Format this report as a table.

4. Save it as List Servers by Make in a Menu Group.

5. Generate a report from this newly saved report template.


In this example, a Combo Box heading was specified with a list of values that will be presented in a drop-down list in the Report Designer, when the user generates the report:

6. Select a Make from the drop-down list and click Generate.

Query Custom Combo BoxThe Report Designer offers a feature to design a combo box that is populated with the results of the query. In addition to configuring the Query Custom Combo Box, a relevant report template query must be constructed to enable accurate report filtering using the combo box.

1. In the Report Designer component, double-click Query custom combo box to access the configuration window.

2. In the Heading field, enter the heading that will appear in the Report Designer with the drop-down list.


3. In the Custom Combo Box query field, supply a query with the following components and then click Validate.

Sample Query Custom Combo Box QueriesSELECT DISTINCT server_id, server_name FROM apt_v_jobSELECT DISTINCT client_id, client_name FROM apt_v_jobSELECT DISTINCT product_type, product_type_name FROM apt_v_jobSELECT DISTINCT job_type, job_type_name FROM apt_v_jobSELECT DISTINCT vendor_status, vendor_status_name FROM apt_v_jobSELECT DISTINCT policy_id, policy_name FROM apt_v_nbu_job_detailSELECT DISTINCT policy_type, policy_type_name FROM apt_v_nbu_job_detailSELECT DISTINCT media_server_id, media_host_name FROM apt_v_nbu_job_detailSELECT DISTINCT storage_array_id, array_name FROM aps_v_array_group

SQL command SELECT DISTINCTKey field,Field value

The comma-separated key and value pair are derived from a published view. For example:Key: storage_array_idValue: array_nameThe Key in the key-value pair is what will substitute the ${queryCombon} variable and the Value is shown in the Combo box.See the Programmer’s Reference Guide for descriptions of the published database views, including the available fields. In addition, these views and fields are available via the Report Template Designer Query component. See Specify the SQL Query.

Published view End the SELECT statement with FROM and the published view, with optional list criteria. For example:FROM aps_v_array_group ORDER BY array_name ASC


4. In the Report Template Designer Query tab, enter a SQL query that will use the value selected in the populated combo box. For example:

Note: If the Combo Box variable is a string, it must be enclosed in single straight quotes to be evaluated as a text field. The above example is a numeric, so single quotes are not used.


Specify the SQL QueryTo see the available database views and fields that can be used when you create a query, see the StorageConsole Database Programmer’s Guide.1. In the Query window, construct your select statement using the following tips:

• Use the drop-down list at the bottom left of the window to select views and fields.• Use these lists to look up the valid tables, fields, and variables. • To insert a view name into a query, double-click on a field and then delete the field

portion. For example, in the aps_v_database_datafiles_log view, click on datafile_id. Then, in the query, delete the .datafile_id portion.

• Double-click on fields to insert them into the query with the correct syntax.• Double-click on variables in the list at the right of the window, to insert variables with

proper syntax into the query—for example, ${endDate}• If you checked Server Group and Client Scope in the initial tabbed Report Designer

window, you’ll see that the drop-down list of Report Designer Variables (at the right of the window) includes Report Scope selections. Using these selections, you can enumerate a list of values for Server Groups (serverGroups) and Clients (hosts). For examples of queries, see Sample Queries.

2. Click Validate Query. • Correct the statement before you proceed.• Use the available lists to look up the valid tables, fields, and variables. • Once the query validates, click Next to proceed to Format the Output.


Sample QueriesThe following queries can serve as a starting point to give you ideas of how to create your own custom queries. In fact, you simply can copy and paste a query from these examples to demonstrate the results in the Report Template Designer.

Technical Community Report SharingAdditional SQL queries are posted by the user community on the News Group Forum (Report Exchange), accessible in the following ways:

• In the Portal: Help > Forum• URL in browser: http://newsgroup.storageconsole.com

Example of a Report of Failed Backup JobsThe following example results in a list of failed jobs.

1. In the Report Template Designer, check both Date Range and Server Groups and Client Scope.

2. In the Query window, enter the following select statement and click Validate Query:SELECT apt_v_job.job_id,apt_v_job.client_id, apt_v_job.client_name,

apt_v_job.server_id, apt_v_job.server_name,

apt_v_job.start_date,apt_v_job.vendor_state_name,

apt_v_job.vendor_status_name

FROM apt_v_job

WHERE apt_v_job.summary_status = 2 --Failed jobs

AND apt_v_job.start_date > ${startDate}

AND apt_v_job.start_date < ${endDate}

AND apt_v_job.client_id IN (${hosts})

3. In the Formatting window, select the fields to be displayed. For this example, it makes sense to Select All and display the report as a Table.

4. Click Next, enter a report name and select a Menu Group. Then, click Finish.

5. When you run this report, specify either a time period or start and end dates. You also can modify the scope to generate the report for a specific server group.

The output will look something like this:


Example of a Server Group Membership ListThe following example reports on server group membership, in display name order.

1. In the Report Template Designer, check only Server Groups and Client Scope.

2. In the Query window, enter the following select statement and click Validate Query:SELECT g.group_name, s.server_id, s.display_name client,

s.hostname, s.ip_address

FROM apt_v_group_member m, apt_v_group g, apt_v_server s

WHERE g.group_id = m.group_id

AND m.child_type = 2 --Server (excludes children that are server groups)

AND m.child_id = s.server_id

AND s.server_id IN (${hosts})

ORDER BY s.display_name, g.group_name

3. In the Formatting window, select the fields to be displayed. For this example, it makes sense to select all and display the report as a Table.

4. Click Next, enter a report name and select a Menu Group. Then, click Finish.

5. When you run this report, you can modify the scope to generate the report for a specific server group.


Note that the column header “client” was substituted for the field name, as specified in the query. You can specify similar substitutions using the Formatting window in the Report Template Designer.

6. Since this query is ordered by display name and then group name, it may be more reasonable to display the output in a similar fashion. Use the Formatting tab to re-arrange the table columns (Move Up, Move Down). See Format the Output.


Example of an Exposed Clients ReportThe following example lists the clients within the report scope that have not been backed up within the selected time frame.


2. In the Query window, enter the following select statement and click Validate Query:SELECT apt_v_job.client_id, apt_v_job.client_name, apt_v_job.server_id,

apt_v_job.server_name

FROM apt_v_job

WHERE apt_v_job.client_id IN (${hosts})

AND apt_v_job.summary_status IN (0,1) -- Success or Warning

HAVING MAX(start_date) < ${startDate}

GROUP BY apt_v_job.client_id, apt_v_job.client_name, apt_v_job.server_id,

apt_v_job.server_name


4. Click Next, enter a report name and click Finish.

5. When you run this report, specify the start and end dates or a time period. So, for example, you could select Last 72 Hours and it will be substituted for startDate, listed in the query. You can modify the scope to generate the report for a specific server group.



Example of Listing Jobs With NotesThe following example lists the jobs with notes within the selected time frame, ordered by server, client, job start date, and note entry date. This particular report provides a quick look at jobs that may need attention because someone has attached a note to the job.


2. In the Query window, enter the following select statement and click Validate Query:SELECT n.note_date, n.user_id, n.user_note, j.client_name, j.server_name,

j.job_type_name, j.start_date, j.finish_date

FROM apt_v_job j, apt_v_job_note n

WHERE j.job_id = n.job_id

AND j.client_id IN (${hosts})

AND j.start_date BETWEEN ${startDate} AND ${endDate}

ORDER BY j.server_name, j.client_name, j.start_date, n.note_date



5. When you run this report, try these selections:• Time Period: Month-to-Date• Check Cascade into sub-groupsThe output will look something like this:


Example of a Pie Chart for Job Size by Job TypeThe following example creates a pie chart that represents the various job types—such as, application backups, full backups, incremental backups, and restores—as segments in a pie chart.

1. In the Report Template Designer, do not check any Report Designer items.

2. In the Query window, enter the following select statement and click Validate Query:SELECT job_type_name,

sum(kilobytes/1024/1024) Job_SIZE_GB

FROM APT_V_NBU_JOB_DETAIL

WHERE

finish_date > sysdate -7

AND job_type_name IS NOT NULL

GROUP BY job_type_name

ORDER BY job_type_name

3. In the Formatting window, select Pie Chart from the Display report as drop-down list.

4. For the Caption field, select job_type_name from the drop-down list.

5. Select all the fields to be displayed.

For a pie chart, you need at least one field to be the caption and another field to be the segment.

6. Click Next, enter a report name and Menu Group. Then, click Finish.


7. When you run this report, the output will look something like this:

Example of the SQL Custom Join FeatureBackup Exec data collection does not populate tables related to tape media—for example, apt_v_tape_media. To include this view in a query so that it will work with Backup Exec data, you’ll need to use an “outer join” (as denoted with (+) in the following query). select apt_v_job.server_name, apt_v_job.job_type, apt_v_job_tape_media.media_name, apt_v_job.client_name, to_char(apt_v_job.start_date, 'YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss AM') start_date, to_char(apt_v_job.finish_date, 'YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss AM') finish_date, apt_v_job.summary_status, apt_v_job_message_log.message, apt_v_job_tape_media.tape_media_id, apt_v_job.kilobytes

from apt_v_job, apt_v_job_tape_media, apt_v_job_message_log

where apt_v_job.job_id = apt_v_job_tape_media.job_id (+)

and apt_v_job.job_id = apt_v_job_message_log.job_id

and apt_v_job.server_id in (${rp.hosts})

and apt_v_job.start_date BETWEEN ${rp.startDate} AND ${rp.endDate}

ORDER BY apt_v_job.server_name, apt_v_job.start_date

Example of NetBackup Catalog Space by Client ListThis example demonstrates how to include sums of a field.1. In the Report Template Designer, check Server Groups and Client Scope.

2. In the Query window, enter the following select statement and click Validate Query:SELECT client_host_name, sum(nbr_of_files),sum(nbr_of_files)*150/1024/1024

FROM apt_v_nbu_job_detail

WHERE client_id in (${hosts})

AND summary_status is not null

AND expiration_date <= sysdate

GROUP BY client_host_name

ORDER BY sum(nbr_of_files) DESC

3. In the Formatting window, select all the fields to be displayed and display the report as a Table.





Using Functions in QueriesThe following functions can be used to further expand the capabilities of the Report Template Designer custom report templates. Note: In most cases, when inserting a function into a Report Template Designer query, it must be prefaced with: rtd.• secsToHoursMinSecs• getServerGroupContextById• APTlistOfDates• APTgetTapeDriveStatusName• APTgetJobTypeName• listOfBackupWindowDates• getServerAttributeValue• aptStringConcat• listJobSummaryAfterRestart

secsToHoursMinSecsThis function is useful for converting job duration to a readable format.secsToHoursMinSecs(totalSecs IN NUMBER)

Example Query:select rtd.secsToHoursMinSecs (duration_secs) from apt_v_job

getServerGroupContextByIdThis function provides the capability for getting specific server group data.FUNCTION getServerGroupContextById(

groupID,

clientID,

depthLevel)

This function returns a character string. Note that in the Report Template Designer query, the function name must be prefaced with: rtd.Specify the following arguments:

Example Query:select rtd.getServerGroupContextById(100000,server_id,3) from apt_v_server

Argument Name Type Length DescriptiongroupID Number 6 This is the highest level server group to be accessedclientID Number 6 Specify a specific ID. For the purpose of a SQL query,

insert a field name from a view, as shown in the following example.

depthLevel Number This number indicates the number of levels down the hierarchical server group tree you want the query to search.


APTlistOfDatesThis function enables you to provide a list of dates to a query.FUNCTION APTlistOfDates(

startDate IN DATE,

endDate IN DATE,

groupBy IN NUMBER)

This function returns a character string. Note that in the Report Template Designer query, the function name must be prefaced with: rtd.

Example Query:select * from table(rtd.APTlistOfDates(to_Date('10012008','MMDDYYYY'), to_date('10032008','MMDDYYYY'), 11))

The output from this example:

THE_DATE

--------------------

01-Oct-2008 00:00:00

02-Oct-2008 00:00:00

03-Oct-2008 00:00:00

The third argument—groupBy—controls the granularity of the results, as follows:

Value Description1 Group by 15 minutes2 Group by 30 minutes10 Group by hour11 Group by day12 Group by week13 Group by month14 Group by quarter15 Group by year


APTgetTapeDriveStatusNameUse this function to access data from:apt_v_tape_drive


FUNCTION APTgetTapeDriveStatusName(

vendorProductType,

vendorDriveStatus)

Example Query:select rtd.APTgetTapeDriveStatusName(d.product_type, d.vendor_drive_status) from apt_v_tape_drive d

The output from this example:Up

In-Use

In-Use

In-Use

Mounting

Argument Name Type LengthvendorProductType NumbervendorDriveStatus Character 1


APTgetJobTypeNameThis function can be used to query database tables related to backup job details, such as apt_v_job and apt_v_nbu_job.

FUNCTION APTgetJobTypeName(

productType,

jobType,

vendorJobType)


Example Query 1:select rtd.APTgetJobTypeName(j.product_type, j.job_type, NULL) from apt_v_job j

Example Query 2:select rtd.APTgetJobTypeName(j.product_type, j.job_type, n.vendor_job_type)

from apt_v_nbu_job n, apt_v_Job j

where j.job_id = n.job_id

The output from this example:Full Backup

Appl Backup

Appl Backup

Argument Name Type LengthproductType Number 2jobType Number 4vendorJobType Number


listOfBackupWindowDatesNote that in the Report Template Designer query, the function name must be prefaced with: rtd.

FUNCTION listOfBackupWindowDates(

startDate,

finishDate,

backupWindowList IN apt_BackupWindowListType)

Based on the backup window definition, the above function returns a list of the adjusted start and finish dates.

Example Query:SELECT start_date, finish_date

FROM TABLE(rtd.LISTOFBACKUPWINDOWDATES(TO_DATE('01012008','MMDDYYYY'), to_DATE('01072008','MMDDYYYY'),

apt_BackupWindowListType(

APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Mon', 40, 64),

APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Tue', 64, 88),

APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Wed', 88, 112),

APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Thu', 112, 136),

APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Fri', 136, 160),

APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Sat', 160, 184),

APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Sun', 16, 40)

)

))

The output from this example:12/31/2007 4:00:00 PM 1/1/2008 3:59:59 PM

1/1/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/2/2008 3:59:59 PM

1/2/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/3/2008 3:59:59 PM

1/3/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/4/2008 3:59:59 PM

1/4/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/5/2008 3:59:59 PM

1/5/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/6/2008 3:59:59 PM

1/6/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/7/2008 3:59:59 PM

Argument Name TypestartDate DatefinishDate DatebackupWindowList


getServerAttributeValueThis function returns a string—the server attribute value.Note that in the Report Template Designer query, the function name must be prefaced with: rtd.

getServerAttributeValue(

serverID,

attributeName)

Example Query 1:select server_id, status

FROM (

select server_id, rtd.getserverattributevalue(server_id,'Status') Status

from apt_v_server s

)

WHERE status IS NOT NULL

order by server_id

aptStringConcatUse this function in a Report Template Designer query to concatenate string values returned from a table.

Example Queryselect aptStringConcat(hostname) from apt_v_server where rownum < 10

This query in the Report Template Designer will generate output similar to:

Argument Name TypeserverID NumberattributeName String in single quotes


listJobSummaryAfterRestartThis function returns a list of NetBackup jobs. It could be used, for example, to determine ultimate success for NetBackup jobs.Note that in the Report Template Designer query, the function name must be prefaced with: rtd.

listJobSummaryAfterRestart(

startDate,

finishDate,

backupWindowId,

clientList,

excludeStatusList,

excludePolicyList,

excludeClientList)

Argument Name TypestartDate DATE with the value derived from the Report DesignerfinishDate DATE with the value derived from the Report DesignerbackupWindowId NumericclientList numberListType

Example: numberListType(1,2,3)excludeStatusList numberListType

Example: numberListType(1,2,3)excludePolicyList numberObjectListType

Example: numberObjectListType(numberObjectType(1), numberObjectType(2))

excludeClientList numberObjectListTypeExample: numberObjectListType(numberObjectType(1), numberObjectType(2)))


Format the Output1. From the Formatting tab, specify the following:

• Output style—Display the report as: Table, Bar Chart, Pie Chart, or Pivot Table.Note: When formatting a Pivot Table, only three fields are used (x, y, and a value). Use the Move Up and Move Down feature to position the fields to easily select three fields.

• Fields from the query that you want to include in the report. Select the checkbox of the query field to indicate the fields to be displayed.

• Select the Display Field and click Formatting (at the bottom of the window) to view the formatting options.

• Label—You can re-label the displayed fields to something more relevant to your needs.

• Data alignment—Left, Center, or Right.• Aggregation: Sum, Average, Minimum, Maximum• Number, Size, and Date and Time patterns.These patterns are based on the Java

classes SimpleDataFormat and NumberFormat.• Type: Bar Chart—See Formatting Example—Bar Chart.• Type: Pie Chart—If you are formatting a Pie Chart, select a character field from the

Caption field drop-down list. The field formatter will show a Type parameter. For pie charts, use numeric fields as pie chart segments. See Example of a Pie Chart for Job Size by Job Type.

• Type: Pivot Table—See Formatting Example—Pivot Table.


http://java.sun.com/j2se/1.4.2/docs/api/java/text/SimpleDateFormat.html

http://java.sun.com/j2se/1.4.2/docs/api/java/text/NumberFormat.html

2. At the bottom of the Formatting window, use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to organize the fields in the order that you want them to appear in a tabular report. Be sure to select a row before shifting the fields.


3. In the Save & Share window, complete the appropriate text boxes to save and share the report, then click OK. You can choose one or more users and user groups. The saved report template will be listed in the report group that you select.

Configuring a Header and Footer in a Custom Report TemplateAt the bottom of the Formatting window in the Report Template Designer, click the Header/Footer button to launch the window where you can define the text and variables that will be displayed when the report is generated.

Any variables used in the query can be included in a header or footer, as shown in the above example.


Formatting Example—Bar ChartThe following example illustrates how to create a Bar Chart and then format it with a dual axis.

1. From the Report Designer tabbed window, select Date Range and Server Groups and Client Scope.

2. Create a query that has a field for the caption, each of the stacked bars, and the line.

3. In the Formatting tabbed section, select the data points and format each so that you have:• 1 caption, n bars, and 1 lineNote: The line will be charted on the right-hand axis.


4. Set the color of the bars.

5. Specify the line formatting.

6. Save the report to the My Reports report menu group. Then, click on the saved report instance to generate it.


Formatting Example—Pivot TableThe following example illustrates a key Report Template Designer formatting feature—Pivot Tables. A pivot table provides a useful mechanism for aggregating and summarizing data. In effect, you are taking the flat rows of data and grouping them into a multi-dimensional representation of the data, enabling easier data analysis. When you format this report, you can have only 3 fields of data, which will be represented in the table as the row, column, and data.

1. From the Report Designer tabbed window, select Date Range and Server Groups and Client Scope and also Custom Combo Box.

2. Select Custom Combo Box and click Configure at the bottom of the Query window.

3. Enter the heading for the drop-down combo box—in this example, Job Size by...

4. Enter the following comma-separated list of values and then click OK: master_host_name, client_host_name, policy_name, policy_type_name, schedule_name, schedule_type_name, storage_unit_label

These will be the options that a user can select when generating a report instance.


5. Click on the Query tab and enter the following query:SELECT to_char(start_date,'MM/DD/YY') run_date, to_char(${freeCombo}) unit, trunc(sum(kilobytes/1024/1024)) size_gb

FROM apt_v_nbu_job_detailWHERE start_date BETWEEN ${startDate} AND ${endDate}

AND client_id in (${hosts})

GROUP BY to_char(start_date,'MM/DD/YY'), ${freeCombo}

6. Click Validate Query and then Next.

7. In the Formatting window, select all three fields: run_date, unit, and size_gb

8. Save the report to a report menu group. Then, click on the saved report instance to generate it.


Advanced Report Template Options - DrilldownsJust as the out-of-the-box reports contain links that drill down to other reports, Custom Reports can be configured to include drilldowns.Fields from the query can be used in the drilldown syntax.In the Report Template Designer, in the Formatting window:1. Select the field that will become the drilldown link.

2. Click Advanced to launch the Drilldown window where you will enter the syntax required to drilldown to the report.


3. In the Drilldown window, enter the details that the Portal will need to link to the report. The following example and the accompanying descriptions illustrate the required components for a drilldown specification.

ExamplesystemName=displayServerDetail&serverId=${row[‘server_id’].data}

Where:

4. Click OK in the Drilldown window.

Edit a Custom Report TemplateOnce you have saved a custom-designed report template, you can return to it to edit its configuration. For example, you can modify the SQL query or share it with additional users.

To edit a custom report template:Right-click on the report template name in the menu group (at the left of the Portal window) and select Edit Report Template.

The Report Template Designer launches so that you can modify the settings.

Editing Report Designer Components

When editing any of the Report Designer components listed in the first Report Template Designer window, be sure to first select the component and then click Configure, as shown in the following example:

systemName systemName - The required prefix for drilldowns to out-of-the-box reports. templateName - The required prefix for drilldowns to custom report templates.

<displayReportName> Insert the specific report system name or template name, along with the variable that is to be supplied by the par-ent report. To identify the systemName of an existing report, gen-erate that report and in the active browser window type: Ctrl-Alt-T

=${row[‘field_name>’]}.data The syntax required for the field name specification



Exporting/Importing Report TemplatesIn support of Web 2.0 community sharing, custom report templates can be exported to a file (.rtd) and then imported into another environment. This feature broadens the access to already developed, unique reports that may be ideal for your environment.

Export a Report TemplateTo export a custom-designed report template from your Portal to a .rtd file:1. Create and save a custom report template using the instructions in Creating a Custom

Report Template.

2. In the Report Navigator pane, right-click on the saved report template and choose Export Report Template.

3. When you confirm your export action in the next window, you are taken to the typical browser “open/save file” window.

4. Click Save File and OK to save this .rtd file so that it can be shared and imported by others.

5. To Import a Report Template, see Import a Report Template.

Import a Report TemplateTo import a custom-designed report template, follow these steps.1. In the toolbar at the top of the Portal window, select Report > Import Template.

2. From the drop-down list, select the destination report folder for the imported template.

3. Browse your local system for the saved template (.rtd) file, select it and click OK.

The imported template will appear in the folder you specified and now can be generated.4. To Export a Report Template, see Export a Report Template.

RECOMMENDATION: Visit the Report Exchange at the online Community Forum for report templates that you can import into your Portal. See Technical Community Report Sharing.


\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\]]]]]]]]]]][=‘qqqe4r5t6y7u78i90op--[=\\APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 6Chapter 2System Administration Reports

This chapter covers the following topics:• Collection Message Summary• Data Collection Message Detail• Database Error Summary• Report Activity Summary• Report Activity Detail• Monitoring Data Collection Status• Scheduled Reports Summary• Top Running Reports• Version History• Data Collector Status Summary

99

Collection Message SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:System Administration Reports > Collection Message SummaryThe Collector Message Summary report lists issues that occurred during the data collection process. Use this report to identify the reason for missing backup and storage capacity status.Currently, data collection messages are available only for:• Legato NetWorker• HP Data Protector• Capacity Manager Host Resources

Data Collection Messages can be filtered (in the Report Designer) by the following criteria:• by Host (see example above)• by Data Collector


• by Child Thread

Collection Message SummaryThis report is accessed via the Error Occurrences drilldown link in the Collector Message Summary.

Collection Message Summary 101

Data Collection Message DetailThis report is accessed via the Last Message Date drilldown link in the Collection Message Summary.


Database Error SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:System Administration Reports > Database Error SummaryThis report provides a diagnostic tool for System Administrators to monitor typical operational functions. More often than not, you will be requested by Customer Care Group to use this diagnostic tool and email the report to them for further investigation. Entries in this report do not necessarily signal problems that require corrective action. For example, if a user inadvertently attempts to create a Domain Name that already exists, an entry will be written to the database error log file and also displayed in this report. Ideally, this report will rarely list errors that require additional actions, but periodic monitoring is recommended.Note: Given that this report extracts customer-specific database messages from a log file, System Administrators should ensure that only authorized personnel are given access to this report.

Database Error Summary 103

Report Activity SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:System Administration Reports > Database Error SummaryThis report presents a graphical representation of the aggregate of the time for Portal report generation. • Mouse over a bar to view the total elapsed time. • Click on a bar to view the Report Activity Detail.

Report Activity DetailTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:System Administration Reports > Database Error SummaryThen, click on a bar in the graph.


Monitoring Data Collection StatusThe details the Data Collection Status tool can be found in the Application Administrator’s Guide. The following step illustrates the ability to access these reports from the Data Collection Status window.1. From the Portal toolbar, choose Tools > Data Collection Status.

2. Expand a product folder.

Note: Currently, messages are available only for Legato NetWorker, HP Data Protector, and Capacity Manager Host Resources. Therefore, the View Messages button will not be accessible for other types of messages.

Monitoring Data Collection Status 105

Scheduled Reports SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:System Administration Reports > Scheduled Reports SummaryUse this report to view and manage scheduled reports. Click on the Frequency link to modify the schedule.


Top Running ReportsUsing this report, you can list the reports that have been running for long periods of time or that have run an excessive number of times. A report will be listed as Top Running, based on its overall cost to the system, determined by the average execution time * run count. By default, the most costly reports are listed first. Note that the average execution time includes not only the database query, but also the time associated with building the report on the Portal server.To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:System Administration Reports > Top Running ReportsSelect the time range for the list in the Report Designer.

Click the Run Count link to view Top Running Report Details.

Dashboard ConsiderationsA dashboard that contains four different reports (portlets) will appear in this Top Running Reports list as four separate records. This summary does not display a row for the high-level dashboard, just the reports contained within the dashboard. • If the portlet within the dashboard is a saved instance of a report, the name of the saved

instance will be displayed in the Report Name column.• If the portlet is not a saved instance—that is, it was simply generated and dragged into the

dashboard—then Dashboard Report will be displayed in the Report Name column.

Top Running Reports 107

Top Running Report DetailsThe Run Count in the Top Running Reports Summary provides access to the list of reports that have consumed higher than average resources. Use this list to determine if any actions need to be taken. For example:• Adjust the scope of the report to narrow the content. • Schedule certain top running reports to be run at off hours.• Verify that automatically schedule reports are scheduled appropriately and are not running

more frequently than is required.• Consider scheduling frequently run reports to run once, with file system exports or emails to

users.


Version HistoryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:System Administration Reports > Version HistoryThe Version History report lists the installation and upgrade events so that you can determine the current version and history of StorageConsole software upgrades. This report enables you to verify that the latest patches have been installed.The Status indicates the success or failure of the installation/upgrade process. The Comments, if available, are derived from the process as well. In many cases, there won’t be any specific comments related to the upgrade.

Version History 109

Data Collector Status SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:System Administration Reports > Data Collector Status SummaryThis report provides an at-a-glance view of any issues that may be occurring with your data collectors. Use Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports and Alerting to alert you when a Data Collector status is set to Error.


\APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 7Chapter 2Backup Manager Management Reports

This chapter covers the following topics:• Using Backup Manager Reports for Analysis• Job Status Summary• Job Summary Report• Job Details Report• Job Volume Summary Report• Job Duration Report• Error Log Summary• Consecutive Errors By Client• Largest Backup Volume• Monthly Backup Summary• Job Summary By Server• Running and Queued Job Summary• HP Data Protector Session Summary• HP Data Protector Session Details

111

Using Backup Manager Reports for AnalysisManagement Reports offer a variety of ways to view data. Using high-level reports, you can quickly summarize your backup status and then when needed, drill down to the details. The Portal reports will quickly replace your command-line tasks that you use to cobble together event status information.These management reports can aid in troubleshooting to:• diagnose malfunctioning servers• determine scheduling conflicts• analyze throughput issues• identify storage media degradation

The following table lists several examples of exposure analysis tasks and the reports that support your diagnostic efforts.

What to do: How to do it:1. Determine the status of your backup

jobs.• What failed and how severely?• Why did a job take so long?• Did another job hold it up?

Refer to Job Status Summary.

Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Status Summary

Drill down to details.2. Diagnose backup scheduling issues. Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job

Duration ReportBackup Manager > Management Reports > Job Volume Summary• From this report, you can click on a bar to drill down to

details in the Job Summary report.3. Diagnose server problems. Backup Manager > Management Reports > Error Log

Summary• Use the default, Group by Server option.

4. Diagnose client problems. Backup Manager > Management Reports > Consecutive Errors By Client• Drilldown to investigate error conditions.• Use the Consecutive Errors by Client report in

conjunction with the Error Log Summary, which displays specific error code messages.


Job Status Summary To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Status SummaryThe Job Status Summary report shows a bar chart that aggregates jobs that succeeded, failed, or produced warning messages. This high-level summary provides drilldown access to the Job Summary report, where you’ll find specific status messages and scheduling information.When you generate this report, several Report Designer options enable you to narrow the scope of the report and also to define how the data will be displayed. Refer to Backup Manager Primary Settings and Backup Manager Advanced Settings. In particular, note the Parent Job Only and Backup Window settings that are available for this report.

Use this procedure to track down backup failure details:1. View the Job Status Summary report.

Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Status Summary2. Click on the top section of a bar in the bar chart to drill down to details.

The top portion of the bar indicates backup error events, the middle section reports event warnings, and the bottom represents successful backups. Note that often the partial backups represent your biggest exposure, so drilling down on the warning events can help you identify and resolve issues.When you drill down to details, you are launching the Job Summary Report.

3. In the Job Summary report, view the Job Status column for backup log messages.

4. In the Job Summary report, click on the Finish Date to view the Job Details Report, which shows additional message-log entries. Be sure to scroll down to the bottom of the list to find backup attempts and notes related to the job.

Related reports:• Job Summary Report. This tabular report provides details related to the data represented in

the bars shown in the Job Status Summary chart. You can drill down to the job summary details from the Job Status Summary bar chart.

• Backup Status SLA Report. In addition to job status, this report provides indicators showing a trend line of event successes.

1. Drillable Stacked Bar Chart

2. Pop-up Details

3. Job Failures

Job Status Summary 113

The Job Status Summary provides the following information:

Drillable Stacked Bar Chart

Click on any of the bar sections to go to a Job Summary Report for the backups corresponding to the time period and event status for the bar that you selected. The top portion of each bar indicates backup error events, the middle section reports event warnings, and the bottom section represents successful backups.

Pop-up Details Mouse-over any of the bars or symbols on the chart to display pop-ups that provide details.

Job Failures The triangle symbol in the chart tracks to the right y-axis and provides at-a-glance backup performance statistics—specifically, it reports the event failures as a percentage of the total events for the selected time period.


Job Summary ReportTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job SummaryWhen you generate this report, several Report Designer options enable you to narrow the scope of the report and also to define how the data will be displayed. Refer to Backup Manager Primary Settings and Backup Manager Advanced Settings. In particular, note the Parent Job Only and Backup Window settings that are available for this report.This report also can be launched from a number of other reports:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Status Summary

• In the Job Status Summary, click a section of a bar to select the job summary by exit code: event failures, event warnings, or successful backups.

Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Duration• In the Job Duration report, click on a bar for a specific time period.

In the Report Designer, use the following options to filter the output:• Event Type: All Backup & Restore Events, All Backup Events, Full Backups, Incremental

Backups, Restores• Event Status: All Events, Successful Events, Warning Events, Successful or Warning Events,

Failed Events• Not all of the following fields will appear in all Job Summary reports. Many fields are

specific to a backup product. For example, NetBackup jobs will display a Policy field that may not be displayed in the Job Summary for other backup products. Also, a job’s result code will be labeled according to the backup product’s standard. For example, NetBackup uses Exit Code, while Backup Exec uses Result Code.

Job Summary Report 115

Job Summary - Heterogeneous Backup ProductsThe fields listed in this table reflect the columns that are displayed when the report scope applies to multiple backup products.

Click on a client name for a job to view the client server details.The management server nameVendor-specific backup softwareThe type of backup job. For a list of the types that are relevant for each backup product, click the Advanced button in the Job Summary Report Designer.Date and time of the beginning of the backup jobClick on this link to launch the Job Details report. For HP Data Protector jobs, multiple items will be reported, representing the HP Data Protector session, which is a collection of clients and their mount points. For these jobs, the finish date is derived from one of the jobs in a session.Backup job durationAmount written to the backup mediaBackup throughputThe exit code of the NetBackup job. For failed jobs, place your mouse on top of the red exit code to view the exit code details in a pop-up tool tip.The number of files written to the backup mediaClick on a tape link to launch a Tape Details Report.

Backup Exec Job SummaryFor a general description of the Job Summary report, see Job Summary Report and Job Summary Advanced Options.

ClientServerProduct

Type

Start DateFinish Date

DurationMBytesMBytes/SecExit Code

# of FilesTapes

Client Click on a client name for a job to view the client server details.Server The management server nameJob Name For Backup Exec jobs, this name links to the Job Details Report.

Policy The name of the backup policy links to the Backup Policy Details.

TypeThe type of backup job. For a list of the types that are relevant for each backup product, click the Advanced button in the Job Summary Report Designer.

Device Name For Backup Exec only, the device name.

Resource For Backup Exec only, the resource.


Start Date Date and time of the beginning of the backup jobFinish Date Click on this link to launch the Job Details report. Duration Backup job durationMBytes Amount written to the backup mediaMBytes/Sec Backup throughputFinal Error The final error code of the Backup Exec job. For failed jobs, place your

mouse on top of the red final error code to view the exit code details in a pop-up tool tip.

Status Indicates the job status: Successful, In Process, Partial, Failed# of Files The number of files written to the backup media


HP Data Protector Job Summary

Click on a client name for a job to view the client server details.The IP Address of the clientThe management server nameFor HP Data Protector jobs, the mount point is listed.Date and time of the beginning of the backup jobClick on this link to launch the Job Details report. For HP Data Protector jobs, multiple items will be reported, representing the HP Data Protector session, which is a collection of clients and their mount points. For these jobs, the finish date is derived from one of the jobs in a session.Backup job durationIndicates the job status: Successful, In Process, Partial, FailedThe number of files written to the backup mediaAmount written to the backup mediaBackup throughput

For a general description of the Job Summary report, see Job Summary Report and Job Summary Advanced Options.Note: For HP Data Protector jobs, multiple items will be reported, representing the HP Data Protector session, which is a collection of clients and their mount points. For these jobs, the finish date is derived from one of the jobs in a session.

NetBackup Job SummaryFor a general description of the Job Summary report, see Job Summary Report and Job Summary Advanced Options.

ClientIP AddressServerMount PointStart DateFinish Date

DurationStatus# of FilesMBytesMBytes/Sec

Job ID The ID of the backup job. Click on this link to view the Job Details Report.

Client Click on a client name for a job to view the client server details.Backup ID The Backup ID links to the Job Details Report.



Start Time Date and time of the beginning of the NetBackup backup jobFinish Time Click on this link to launch the NetBackup Job Details report.Duration Backup job duration


NetWorker Job Summary

Click on a client name for a job to view the client server details.This NetWorker-specific field indicates the backup save set associated with the client’s backup job.The management server nameNetWorker-specific group associated with the backup.This NetWorker-specific field indicates the backup level/type: Full, Incremental, Migration, Manual, Consolidate, Copy, Diff, 1-9, RestoreDate and time of the beginning of the backup jobClick on this link to launch the Job Details report. Backup job durationAmount written to the backup mediaBackup throughputIndicates the job status: Successful, In Process, Partial, FailedIndicates the progress of the backup job, such as Completed or Incomplete.Click on a tape link to launch a Tape Details Report.

For a general description of the Job Summary report, see Job Summary Report and Job Summary Advanced Options.

TSM Job SummaryFor a general description of the Job Summary report, see Job Summary Report and Job Summary Advanced Options.

MBytes Amount written to the backup mediaMBytes/Sec Backup throughputExit Code The exit code of the NetBackup job. For failed jobs, place your mouse

on top of the red exit code to view the exit code details in a pop-up tool tip.

# of Files The number of files written to the backup mediaTapes Click on a tape link to launch a Tape Details Report.

ClientSave Set

ServerGroup

Levels

Start DateFinish DateDurationMBytesMBytes/SecStatusState

Tapes

Client Click on a client name for a job to view the client server details.Node Name For TSM jobs, the Node Name links to the Server Details report.Server The management server name



Job Summary Advanced OptionsIn the Job Summary Report Designer, click Advanced to access several advanced options, as shown below.

The report time period is always in the master server’s time. If you select Advanced options and change the time zone, the jobs that are returned are based on the time zone applied to the job start/finish date. The displayed dates are always in the master server time zone; just the selection of jobs that qualifies in the report time period changes.


Schedule If a backup schedule is available, this link will display the Policy Domain Details (for TSM).

Start Date Date and time of the beginning of the backup jobFinish Date Click on this link to launch the Job Details report. Duration Backup job durationMBytes Amount written to the backup mediaMBytes/Sec Backup throughputExit Code The exit code of the backup job. For failed jobs, place your mouse on

top of the red exit code to view the exit code details in a pop-up tool tip.Result Code For TSM, the Result Code indicates degrees of success. Refer to the

TSM documentation for details.Status Indicates the job status: Successful, In Process, Partial, Failed# of Files The number of files written to the backup media


Job Details ReportTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job SummarySeveral reports—for example, Job Summary Report—contain a Finish Date link, which launches a Job Details report.Note: For NetBackup and Legato NetWorker jobs, the Job Details report may include a View Files button. This option is available if the server has been configured to Capture File Details. See Capture File Details in the Application Administrator’s Guide. This feature should be used only for critical servers, as it may impact performance.

Figure 7.1 Example of View Files Button

Job Details Report 121

In the Backup Files Navigator, use the typical click and double-click actions to expand/collapse folders to view specific files.

Job Details The first column in the job detail provides a complete breakdown of the job. To get information about the client, management server, or media server, click on their respective links. The actual job details depend on your report.

Client Click the client name to view the Server Details.

Node Name Displayed only for TSM jobs.

Vendor Product

Vendor-specific backup software.

Job IDBackup job unique identifier, For NetBackup jobs, this is the ID assigned by the backup software. For all other backup jobs, this is a unique StorageConsole internal ID.

Backup ID Unique backup ID.

Job Type One of the following: Full Backup, Incremental Backup, Restore.

Job Status Reflects the success of the job: Partial, Successful, Failed.

Job State Indicates if the job actually finished running.

Result Code

This vendor-specific code can be used to track down troubleshooting tips in the backup vendor’s reference guides.

Scheduled Start Time

The planned date and time of the job’s initiation.

Actual Start Date

Date and time of the beginning of the backup job.

Actual Finish Date

Date and time when the backup job ended.

Duration Backup job duration.

Time zone The time zone where the job ran.


Backup Details

The second column of this report provides server particulars.

Policy and Schedule Details

Click on the policy or schedule name to go to the policy/schedule detail page, which provides even more details about the policy and schedule that governs the job.

Paths and Related Jobs

The paths being backed up for the job are displayed in a comma-delimited list. When there are multiple related jobs, each of the jobs and associated paths is displayed in the related jobs listing. Clicking on any of the related job IDs will take you to the Job Details report.

Backup Image

Click on the Media Name to access additional details in the Tape Details report.

Job Attempts

When there are re-try attempts for any given job, each attempt will be listed in the attempts section at the bottom of the Job Detail. Each attempt row displays details of that attempt, including but not limited to, the backup ID, backup status, started writing date, finished writing date, and transfer rate.

Server Click the Server name to launch the Server Details report.

Total Job Size (MB)

Job size in MB.

# of Tapes Number of tapes used by this backup job.

# of Files Number of files backed up by this job.

Tape IDs Which tapes were used by the job.

Storage Unit Physical device name.

File List Directory path of the file list location.

Disk Pathnames Disk pathnames

Policy Name Click the policy name to launch the Policy Details screen.

Policy Type Assigned by the System Administrator.

Policy Domain Displayed only for TSM jobs.

Schedule Click the schedule name to launch the Policy Details screen.

Schedule Type The name of the schedule type

Compressed/Encrypted

Indicates how the backup data was treated.

Job Details Report 123

Adding a Note to a JobAs you view the Job Details report, you can add a note that will remain attached to the job. The note automatically supplies your email address and the date the note was added. You supply a message. This feature offers an essential audit trail capability to ensure Sarbanes-Oxley compliance.

To add a note to a job:1. Launch the Job Details report from the Job Summary report.

Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Job Summary2. In the Job Summary report, click a Finish Date link to display the Job Details report.

3. In the Job Details report, right-click and then select Add a Note.

In a similar fashion, you can clear all notes.Tip: When you add a note to a job or clear all notes, you’ll need to refresh the Job Detail page so that you can view the results of your action.


Job Volume Summary Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Volume SummaryThe Job Volume Summary report shows the number of files and amount of data (in KB) that you backed up for a specified time period. While the Job Status Summary report approaches the data from an “event status” point of view, the Job Volume Summary report presents data from the perspective of “how much” has been backed up, with a focus on determining if your scheduling is balanced.The true value of this high-level report is its ease of use. At a glance—and with a few mouse clicks—you can ascertain problematic time periods, consumption trends, and scheduling peaks.

Use this procedure to analyze volume usage trends:1. View the Job Volume Summary report.

Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Volume Summary2. Mouse-over a triangle at the top of a bar that indicates a peak usage period.

A pop-up displays the number of files that were backed up for that period.3. Click anywhere on the bar to launch the Job Summary Report.

In the Job Summary report, pay attention to the data in the following columns: Duration, Written, MBytes/Sec, Exit Code and Job Status. This data gives you an idea of which jobs have over-tasked your storage. Remember that you can sort the report columns to group jobs that took the longest or that failed.

The Job Volume Summary report provides the following information:

1. Drillable Bar Chart

2. Pop-up Details

3. Backup Volume

4. Backup Files

Drillable Bar Chart

Click on any of the bars to go to a Job Summary Report page for the backups that correspond to the time period of the bar that you selected.

Pop-up Details Mouse-over any of the bars or symbols on the chart to display pop-ups that provide details.• Bar: Displays the volume of data backed up for the associated time period.• Triangle symbol: Displays the total number of files backed up.

Backup Volume Lists the amount of data backed up.Backup Files Lists the # of files backed up.

Job Volume Summary Report 125

Job Duration Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job DurationThe Job Duration report combines into one view, information about both backup and restore duration. If, on a specific day, there were two backup events that completed after 1 hour and 3 hours respectively, and one restore completed after .5 hours, the bar reports a duration of 4.5 hours.You can also report on a single event type:

• All Backup Events• Full Backups• Incremental Backups• Restores

The Job Duration report provides the following information:

Use this report as a starting point to determine why certain days show excessive backup durations.

To diagnose excessive backup durations:

1. View the Job Duration bar chart, looking for excessive duration times.

1. Drillable Bars in Chart

2. Pop-up Details

3. Duration

Drillable Bars in Chart

Click on any of the bar sections to go to a Job Summary Report for all corresponding events.

Pop-up Details Mouse-over any of the bars or symbols on the chart to display pop-ups that provide details.This pop-up lists the total duration for the selected time period.

Duration The total amount of time the backup and restore events took to complete. If on a specific day there were two backup events that completed after 1hr and 3hrs respectively, and one restore completed after .5 hours, the bar reports a duration of 4.5 hours.


2. Click on the bar for a troublesome day to launch the Job Summary Report.

3. In the Job Summary Report, click on the Duration column header to sort the data by Duration. Now you’ll see excessive client usage at the top of the list. You might also sort by MBytes/Sec to identify throughput issues.

4. In the Job Summary Report, click on the Finish Date of a suspect job to display the Job Details Report.

By using a combination of reports, you can figure out if some jobs held up others, if there are server problems that require your attention, or if consecutive errors are symptomatic of storage device failure or media degradation.

Job Duration Report 127

Error Log Summary To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Error Log SummaryThe Error Log Summary reports backup failure details that have been gleaned from backup error logs. Use this report in conjunction with the Consecutive Errors By Client report to mitigate future problems by determining which types of errors occurred with the greatest frequency.You can customize this summary to report by a specific group:• Server (the default)• Client• Policy

In each of the group views, the Error Code Description typically provides sufficient details to start your troubleshooting process. For example, a NetBackup error code of 196 would be an indicator that there are not enough resources available and a Virtual Tape Library (VTL) may be needed. The 196 indicates that the client backup cannot begin because drives are not available. Refer to the backup product’s reference guides for additional guidance. You could investigate further by generating a Tape Library and Drive Utilization Report to identify how many tape drives are writing and for how long. In addition, the Drive Utilization and Performance Report provides insight into the throughput, with drilldowns to drive performance.Note: Click on any of the column headings to sort the table by column.

This report displays a number of links that enable drilldown access to additional details, as described in the following table.

The Error Log Summary provides the following information:

Note: Some of the following fields do not appear in every Error Log Summary. Each of the three report types—Client, Server, Policy—contains only the fields that make sense for its group.Server The server is the system that is managing the storage devices.Client The system that was backed up.


IP Address The IP address of the client, shown only in the Error Log Summary By Client report.Policy If you selected Group By Policy through the Report Designer, the policy name

appears in this column. This column does not appear if you selected Group By Management Server.

Backup Product Indicates the backup software running on the server where the error occurred. Refer to that product’s documentation to correlate the error code to diagnose problems.HP Data ProtectorLegato NetworkerSymantec Backup ExecNetBackupTivoli Storage Manager

Error Code Numeric code reported by the backup product. Refer to the backup product’s reference guides for troubleshooting advice.

Error Occurrences

Each row in the table displays the number of occurrences for each error code within the report’s selected time frame.Click on any error occurrence to go to the Job Summary report, which lists the events that correspond to that particular error code.

Last Error Date Click on the Last Error Date to go to the Job Summary report, which displays the most recent error events only, including skipped files.

Error Code Description

Each row in the table includes a detailed error description that provides you with valuable information. Since the data is derived from backup job error logs, this description is backup-product dependent.

Error Log Summary 129

Consecutive Errors By Client To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports> Consecutive Errors by ClientUse this report to proactively manage clients and servers. Consecutive errors may portend hardware reliability issues. Using this report you can identify not only consecutive errors, but also the number of consecutive days that the errors persisted.The default order for this listing is descending order, with the clients having the most consecutive errors listed first. Correlate the number of consecutive errors with the number of consecutive days so that you can disregard errors that appear to be intermittent.Note: Click on any of the column headings to sort the table by column.

The Consecutive Errors by Client report provides the following information:

Client Name The client is the system that is being backed up.IP Address Client’s IP address on the LAN.Server Name The server is the system that is managing the storage devices. Click on any server

name to link to the Server Details page, which provides you comprehensive information about that server. Then, from the Server Details page, click on the Server Group link to determine the server groups to which this server belongs.

# of Consecutive Errors

# of consecutive errors logged within the designated time frame.Click on the number to launch the related Job Summary report where you’ll find a detailed listed of the errors.


# of Consecutive Days

# of days in which the client’s consecutive errors were logged.

First/Last Error Dates

Date of the first and last errors, within the specified time frame, gleaned from logs. The range between the first and last error dates gives some insight into the severity of the problem. Click on each of the error dates to generate two separate Job Summary reports so that you can compare the snapshots of the start and end of the error events.

Consecutive Errors By Client 131

Largest Backup VolumeTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Largest Backup VolumeUse this report to identify consumers of your most utilized backup volume. A pie chart graphically represents the usage that also is listed in the legend. This report will help you identify greedy servers or applications.Click the server links in the legend to drill down to details.

The Largest Backup Volume is a real-time snapshot of the largest server backup consumers within the report scope. • Hold your mouse over any of the pie chart sections a pop-up will display pertinent server

consumption details.• Click on any section of the pie chart to view the Server Consumption Summary report for that

particular server.


Monthly Backup SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Monthly Backup SummaryorBackup Manager > Administration Reports > Data Protection Dashboard

Client Server

Clicking the server name will point you to the Server Details report which provides detailed information regarding the server, including but not limited to: IP Address, ID Number, Make, Model, OS, and Server Group Membership.

Total Backups

The total backup jobs that ran for the associated client server

MBytes The amount of data backed up for the client serverLast Backup

The Monthly Backup Summary provides you with the date and time of the most recent backup event for each server in their server group. Clicking on the link will take you to theJob Details report where you can view backup details

Last Full Backup

The Monthly Backup Summary provides you with the date and time of the most recent fullbackup event for each server in the chosen server group. Clicking on the link will take youto the Job Details report where you can view backup details regarding the full backup, including but not limited to: Job Type, Exit Status, Status Description, # of Tapes, Tape ID#s, and # of Files.

Monthly Backup Summary 133

Job Summary By ServerTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Summary By Server

The backup management server.Jobs that are currently running and have been assigned to a storage unit. this value is the total current running jobs and is not constrained by the selected report time period scope. Jobs that are queued for an available storage unit. This value is the total currently queued jobs and it is not constrained by the selected report time period scope.Jobs that completed successfully on their first try.Jobs that completed successfully after two or more attempts.Jobs that completed, but were partial jobs with one or more warnings.Jobs that completed, but a fatal error occurred.Each numeric column is totalled at the bottom of the table.

This report displays the number of jobs and their status, for jobs started during the time period that you specified for the report.Note: Only NetBackup and Legato jobs are supported for this report. Also, the report requires a homogeneous server scope—that is, choose either all NetBackup servers or all Legato servers in your scope selection.

Correlate the data in this report with the information in the Real Time Library and Drive Status to determine if there are problems with the server. For example, if the Job Summary By Server shows jobs in the queue and the Real Time Library and Drive Status shows available drives, something is preventing the queued jobs from getting to running status.

Note: The report for Legato servers is titled, Real Time Save Set Summary.

ServerRun

Que

1st2+WarningsErrorsTotal


Running and Queued Job SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > Running and Queued Job SummaryNote: Only NetBackup and NetWorker jobs are supported for this report. Also, the report requires a homogeneous server scope—that is, choose either all NetBackup servers or all NetWorker servers in your server group scope selection. For NetWorker, this report is titled, Running Save Sets Summary.

The Running and Queued Jobs Summary displays any job that was running or queued at the time the management servers were polled.

Jobs that require attention (long-running, stalled, or slow jobs) will be highlighted in red and moved to the top of the running and queued jobs list so that they are quickly noted by administrators and handled appropriately. Each of these flagged jobs will be accompanied by one or more icons to indicate the type of potential problem.• clock - indicates a long running job (>= 12 hours).• arrow / barrier - indicates a stalled job (no write activity for >= 15 minutes)• snail - indicates and slow running job (kilobytes per second throughput <= 200 Kb/sec)

Running and Queued Job Summary 135

Enables drill down access to the server detailsDrill down to Client detailsThe name of the backup policy associated with the jobThe NetBackup job IDAmount of data attempting to be backed upDate of the attempted backupThe length of the backup jobTransfer rateThe date and time of the last write.Indicator icons indicate long-running, stalled, or slow-running jobs: clock = long running job (>= 12 hours); arrow / barrier = stalled job (no write activity for >= 15 minutes); snail = slow running job (kilobytes per second throughput <= 200 Kb/sec)

NetBackup Running and Queued Jobs Summary

NetWorker Running Save Sets Summary

Enables drill down access to the server detailsDrill down to Client detailsThe NetWorker Save Set IDThe length of the backup jobIndicator icons indicate long-running, stalled, or slow-running jobs: clock = long running job (>= 12 hours); arrow / barrier = stalled job (no write activity for >= 15 minutes); snail = slow running job (kilobytes per second throughput <= 200 Kb/sec)

ServerClientPolicy NameJob IDTry (MB)Try Start DateDurationKB/SecLast WrittenIndicators

ServerClient/GroupSave Set IDDurationIndicators


HP Data Protector Session SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > HP DP Session SummaryThe Session Summary report provides an overview of the HP Data Protector backup/restore sessions.

Session Name Backup/restore session name—links to the HP Data Protector Session Details report

Event Type unknown, backup, restoreBackup Type incremental, differential, transaction, full, or deltaSpecification Name of the HP Data Protector backup specificationStart Time Backup/restore start timeEnd Time Backup/restore end timeSuccess Percentage % of backup/restore session that was successful MB Amount of data backed upStatus Session Status: unknown, completed, completed/failures, or failedTapes The tapes used for the backup/restore session

HP Data Protector Session Summary 137

HP Data Protector Session DetailsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Management Reports > HP DP Session Summary

Then, click on a Session Name.The Session Details report provides details for HP Data Protector backup/restore sessions.

Session Name Backup/restore session nameBackup Type incremental, differential, transaction, full, or deltaSuccess Percentage % of backup/restore session that was successful Start Time Backup/restore start timeEnd Time Backup/restore end timeCell Manager The name of the Cell Manager server links to the Server

Details.# of Errors Indicates the number of session errors. These error messages

will be included in the Session Message table.Specification The HP Data Protector backup specification links to the HP

Data Protector Backup Specification Summary.User Name Session user nameMBytes Amount of data backed up by this session# of Media The list of media associated with this sessionProduct Type HP Data Protector


Status Session Status: unknown, completed, completed/failures, or failed

Group Name Group NameDuration Length of the session# of Warning Messages Indicates the number of session warning messages. If there are

any warning messages, they will be listed in the table below the session details.

HP Data Protector Session Details 139


APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 8Chapter 7Backup Administration Reports

This chapter covers the following topics:• Operations Dashboard• Command Center Dashboard• Data Protection Dashboard• Message of the Day Report• Server Details Report• Server Group• Mission Control Report• Client Protection Summary• TSM Storage Pools Dashboard• Client Job Histogram

141

Operations Dashboard To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Operations Dashboard

The Operations Dashboard provides you with multiple views of your backup environment on a single page.

1. Job Status Summary

2. Current Media Summary

3. Largest Backup Volume Report

4. Storage Unit Status

Job Status Summary

Displays the number of successful, warning and error events for each time period.The dashed yellow line displays the SLA success goal while the triangle symbols track actual achievement for each day.Clicking on any of the bars will take you to the Job Summary Report for the corresponding event status and time frame.

Current Media Summary

Provides a real-time snapshot of all the media utilized by the servers within the report scope.Mouse-over any of the pie-chart sections to display pop-ups that provide pertinent details about the media of the corresponding status.Click on any section of the pie-chart or the to go to the Tape Media Summary report for all media with the corresponding status. Click on the Total Tape Media link to go to the Tape Media Summary report for all the servers within the report scope.


Largest Backup Volume Report

Provides a real-time snapshot of the largest server backup consumers within the report scope.Mouse-over any of the bars or symbols on the chart to display pop-ups that provide details.Click on any section of the pie-chart to go to the Server Consumption Summary Report for a particular server.

Click on the Total Servers link to go to the Server Consumption Summary report for all the servers within the report scope.

Storage Unit Status

Each file system is identified by the file system path, with its management server displayed above the file system graphic. The total number of Storage Units sharing the same file system is also shown. The display of this report is dependent on the backup products in your environment and the report scope.

Each file system is accompanied by a thermometer, which indicates the percentage of space occupied and available on the file system. The Used value is as reported by the operating system, and includes space occupied by all backup images as well as any other files that may reside on that file system. The Free value also is reported by the operating system.

Used and free values of Unknown indicate the Discovery module has not been configured to probe the media servers’ file systems for their physical characteristics.

Operations Dashboard 143

Command Center Dashboard To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Command Center DashboardThe Command Center Dashboard provides four portlets with a real-time view of your backup environment. Note: Only NetBackup and Legato jobs are supported for this dashboard. Also, the dashboard requires a homogeneous server scope—that is, choose either all NetBackup servers or all Legato servers in your scope selection.

Job Summary by Server

Displays the number of jobs and the job status for the time period that you selected in the report scope:

You can drill down on any non-zero value to view the Job Summary Report for those corresponding jobs. Additionally, you can drill down further to the more comprehensive Job Detail Report for any individual jobs listed in the summary.

Real Time Library and Drive Status

Summarizes each tape library in your environment. The data will only be as current as the time of the most recent poll of your management server(s) by the Data Collector.Monitor the health of each library by tracking the number of drives up, down, in use and available within each tape library. When the number of down drives in a library is equal to or greater than 25%, the text for the library’s row is flagged in red.

Server The backup management server.Run Jobs that are currently running and have been assigned to a

storage unit. this value is the total current running jobs and is not constrained by the selected report time period scope.

Que Jobs that are queued for an available storage unit. This value is the total currently queued jobs and it is not constrained by the selected report time period scope.

1st Jobs that completed successfully on their first try.2+ Jobs that completed successfully after two or more attempts.Warnings Jobs that completed, but were partial jobs with one or more

warnings.Errors Jobs that completed, but a fatal error occurred.


Real Time Storage Unit Utilization

The Real Time Storage Unit Component displays current high-level information for each storage unit in your environment. Each storage unit listed provides you with several columns of pertinent information.

The Drives Up column combined with the Jobs Queued and Jobs Running columns help you determine whether a storage unit is functioning properly. For instance, if there are jobs in the queue for a storage unit, and there are also drives available within a storage unit, there may be something preventing the queued jobs from moving to the running status.

Running and Queued Jobs Summary

Displays any job that was running or queued at the time the Data Collector last polled the management server(s). Click any Job ID # in the list to retrieve comprehensive detail about a specific job.The total number of running jobs displayed on the dashboard is limited. If the number of running and queued jobs exceeds the limit, all the running and queued jobs can be viewed in a separate report by clicking the Total Running and Queued Jobs link.The following jobs require attention, so the report highlights them in red and moves them to the top of the running and queued jobs list. Each of these flagged jobs will be accompanied by one or more icons to indicate the potential problem:

Storage Unit The name of the unit.Media Server Click this link to display the Server Details Report.Type The type of unit, such as Disk, Disk Staging, Media Manager, or

NDMP (Network Data Management Protocol).Total Drives The unit’s configuration.Jobs Run Jobs that are currently running and have been assigned to a

storage unit. This value is the total current running jobs and is not constrained by the selected report time period scope.

Max Drives Notes the maximum drives per job.Max Multiplex/Drives

The maximum number of concurrent drives.

Clock Long >= 12 hours

Arrow/barrier Slow

<= 200 Kb/sec

Snail Stalled No write activity for >= 15 minutes

Long 12 hours

Slow <200 kilobytes per second

Stalled 1800 seconds (30 mins)

Command Center Dashboard 145

Data Protection Dashboard To access this dashboard, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Data Protection DashboardThe Data Protection Dashboard contains the following reports:• Message of the Day Report• Job Status Summary• Mission Control Report• Monthly Backup Summary

In the Data Protection Dashboard Report Designer, in addition to specifying a time period, you also can choose to omit backup retries.


Message of the Day ReportTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Data Protection DashboardThis report provides a starting point for handling issues that require immediate attention. Specifically, it lists the failed backups and restores per server. From these lists, you can drill down to the Server Details Report, the Job Summary Report, and the Mission Control Report.

Drill down for additional details:

1. To access the Server Details Report, click a link under the Server column.

2. To access Job Summary reports, click a Finish Date link.

Message of the Day Report 147

Server Details ReportThis report can be accessed from numerous reports via either Client or Server name links, such as:

• Job Summary Report• Consecutive Errors by Client• Disk Usage and Performance• Billing and Chargeback Summary• Server Group listings

Click the server name to go to the Server Details screen for additional information.Note: The output is specific to the server type, as shown in the following examples.

Host AliasesSome servers also may show a list of host aliases in this Server Details report:


Edit Server Details

IP Address The server’s IP address

Location Server location, as supplied by the System Administrator

Make Vendor name, such as IBM or Sun

Model The product’s alphanumeric identifier

OS The specific version of the operating system, such as Solaris 9

Server Details Report 149

Server Group Membership

Click a group link to access the Server Group listing.

Filespaces

The filespace section at the bottom of this report provides the following data (for TSM only):• Node• Filespace• Capacity• Free• Volumes: Click links to access specific volumes.• Storage Pool


Server GroupThis report can be accessed from the Server Details Report. In the Server Details Report, click a Group Member link to list the clients/servers belonging to that server group.

The Server Group table provides the following information. Note that the columns that are shown may vary, depending on the type of server group:

Client Link to the Server Details Report.

Server Link to the Server Details Report for the backup server.

Last Backup Link to the Job Summary Report.

Backups this month The number of the client’s backups for the month.

Total Available (MB) Amount of available space on this client

Capacity (MB)The server’s capacity, if it can be determined. In the case of backup clients, the capacity may be unknown to StorageConsole.

Backup Product The backup software that performed the backups.

Node For TSM servers, the node name

Server Group 151

Mission Control Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Data Protection DashboardorBackup Manager > Administration Reports > Mission ControlThe Mission Control report provides you with a comprehensive snapshot of your backup and restore event status. Using this report, you can easily identify servers that have had no backups or failed backups. And, you can drilldown to ascertain the root cause of unsuccessful backups. Organizations use this report to ensure Sarbanes-Oxley compliance, as it shows ultimate backup success over time.When you generate this report, the Report Designer prompts you to select scope parameters, including the options to Ignore Retries and also to Exclude Clients with Successful Backups. If the “Exclude Clients with Successful Backups” checkbox was checked in the Report Designer, only clients with at least one “No Jobs” or “Failed” indicator will be shown. Note that if the last column corresponds to the current day and the indicator is “No Jobs” and all other indicators for the row are successful, the row will be considered a “success” and therefore will be excluded from the report.


Note: A row can be expanded to list underlying details for NetBackup, Legato, and HP Data Protector servers. For Tivoli Storage Manager and Backup Exec, an expansion arrow will not be available. Also, the Flashback policy type (used for VM backups) is not supported; however, an expansion arrow may be displayed, with no underlying details available.

1. Event Status

2. Current Date Range

3. Status Indicators

Event Status Displays a row for each server within the report scope. Click on any server name in the list to go to the Server Details page for that server.Some servers will have an arrow next to it, which can be used to expand the server to show the underlying file systems.

Current Date Range

The date range that is currently displayed in the report is always listed at the top of the report. If the date range is beyond the current day, or before your backup environment data started being pushed to the Reporting Database, the event indicator will be “No Jobs.”

Mission Control Report 153

Tailoring the Report Output by Backup ProductIn the Report Designer, click Advanced.

Note that the options available in this window depend on the backup product data collection options that have been enabled for your Portal.

Status Indicators Each day column for every server contains an event status indicator with the following color codes. The indicator always reflects the most serious status if there is more than one event for that server on that day. For example, if there are three successful events and one failure, the indicator will be red.

Click on any of the indicators to go to the Job Summary Report for all events associated with that server on that day. Once in the Job Summary Report, you can drilldown to Job Details and even add a note to indicate the strategy for resolving an issue—thus, providing an audit trail.

Blue Successful events

Yellow Warning events

Red Failed events


Client Protection Summary To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Client Protection SummaryNote: The Client Protection Summary is available only if you have purchased the optional add-on Discovery module. This report is NetBackup-specific.

With the Discovery module, you can use the Client Protection Report Designer to customize and personalize a Client Protection Summary that will identify exposure and threats to an enterprise data protection environment.

The Client Protection Report provides a single-pane view of the protection status for the list of clients or servers. This is a tabular report with the following columns:

Client Protection Summary 155

Clients and File Systems

Lists all clients and devices in the scope of the report along with their key attributes:

Active Coverage

Full: The client is completely protected—that is, an active policy exists that references the complete drive or file system as an include path. For example, the file system /home is referenced as an include path in the policy Unix_servers_home. Partial: No active policies exist that reference the complete drive or file system. However, one or more active policies exist that reference a subset of the drive or file system as an include path. For example, for the file system /home, the include path /home/fred is referenced in an active policy. None: There are no active policies that reference either the entire or any subset of the drive or file system.Unknown: The coverage level is unknown. Typically, this level is displayed if NetBackup is not detected on the client.

Protection Status

Blue: Successful full backup for the device or file system occurred within the report period and one or more active policies provide FULL coverage as defined above; Yellow: Successful full backup for the device or file system occurred within the report period, but the active policies only provide PARTIAL coverage. Red: No successful full backup for the device or file system occurred within the report period. Coverage level is irrelevant. White: The protection status and coverage level is unknown. Typically this status is displayed if NetBackup is not detected on the client.

Last Backups

Lists the date and time of the last successful and last attempted FULL backups for the drive or file system.

Covering Policies

Displays the backup policy name, if the drive or file system contains one or more policies. Click on an individual policy to view the policy details.

Exclude From Report

Select the Exclude check box to exclude specific clients, devices, or file systems from the report. The selected items no longer appear in subsequent reports. To subsequently include/exclude clients, file systems, and unresolved hosts, use the check boxes in the Report Designer: Show excluded clients, Show excluded File Systems, Show unresolved hosts, and Expand All Clients.

Client

The name of the client or device as returned by the backup software or a dns lookup of the IP address. If the name is not returned by DNS, the report displays the IP address. Click on the client to view the Client Details. If the discovery process is unable to resolve the name of a client, the IP address will be displayed. To prevent unresolved clients from appearing in the report, clear the Show unresolved hosts check box in the Report Designer.

OS Type The operating system type returned by the discovery process.

Backup Product

Currently, only NetBackup is detected.

Device Drives or file systems uncovered by the discovery process—for example, C:\, /export, and /.


TSM Storage Pools Dashboard To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Administration Reports > TSM Storage Pools Dashboard

The TSM Storage Pools Dashboard provides a real-time view into capacity and process status information for the selected list of TSM Storage Pools. In a single pane, you quickly can analyze capacity and process status information for each of the Storage Pools.

Storage Pool CapacityThe pie chart displays the percentage and GBytes used and available for the Storage Pool. The GBytes Used is calculated by multiplying the percentage used by the estimated capacity of the Storage Pool.

Storage Pool Attributes

Server Backup Server name

Type Primary, Copy

Device Type Sequential, Random

Access Type Read/Write, Read only

Reclaim Threshold

TSM can reclaim volumes that exceed a reclamation threshold—that is, a percentage of unused space on the volume. This threshold value is set by the TSM administrator, within TSM.

TSM Storage Pools Dashboard 157

Storage Pool UtilizationThis is a historical tracking bar chart that displays the history of used and available capacity for the selected storage pool.

Tape Occupancy SummaryThis pie chart displays a summary of the GBytes and number of tapes used by each client/server that occupy this Storage Pool. The chart displays the top eight tape media consumers of this Storage Pool. Click on any of the client/server names to view detailed tape media consumption information

Tape Media SummaryThis pie chart shows a summary of all the tapes assigned to this Storage Pool. This pie chart displays both the percentage of tapes grouped by media status, and the number of tapes grouped by media status: • Filling• Full• Pending• Empty

Storage Pool Process HistoryThis historical tracking bar chart displays the summary status of any TSM process that used this Storage Pool. Examples of TSM processes that are plotted on this bar chart are: Storage Pool Backups, Migrations, Expirations, etc. Click on a bar in this graph to view the TSM Process Summary.

Next Storage PoolThe storage pool that is next in line for backups when the current pool reaches capacity—that is, the destination storage pool for migrated data. TSM automatically requests a storage pool when needed.

Max Scratch

The maximum amount of scratch space allocated to the storage pool. When the number of scratch volumes that TSM is using for the storage pool exceeds the maximum number of scratch volumes specified, the storage pool can run out of space.

Capacity (GB) Storage pool capacity

% Utilized Percentage used

% Migrated Estimated percentage of storage that can be migrated

Low Mig %The value used by TSM to start/stop migration. This percentage indicates when the server should stop migrating files to the next available storage pool.

High Mig %The value used by TSM to start/stop migration. This percentage indicates when the server should start migrating files to the next available storage pool.

Max Size (MB) The maximum size of the storage pool.


TSM Process SummaryThis report is accessed from the TSM Storage Pool Dashboard, by clicking a bar in a Storage Pool Process History graph.

This report provides indicators of the type of job, as well as, the number of files and the relevant tape IDs.

TSM Process Summary 159

Client Job HistogramTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Client Job HistogramFrom the Client Job Histogram Report Designer, you can select one of the following options:• Job Throughput Histogram• Job Activity Histogram

These reports provide hour-by-hour data for the previous 24-hour period.Using these reports, you can identify bottlenecks and adjust your environment accordingly.

Job Throughput HistogramThis report provides colored visual cues for quickly determining the backup throughput trends for clients that had backup jobs within the previous 24 hours. This report shows completed jobs that started within the selected time period. These jobs could have a completion status of either successful or warning.• Red - Indicates below average throughput—less than 5 MB/second• Yellow - Indicates average throughput—greater than 5 MB/second and less than 9 MB/

second• Blue - Indicates above average throughput—greater than 9 MB/secondNote: The breakdown is based on the average, not the mean throughput.


Job Activity HistogramThe Job Activity Histogram lists clients that had backup jobs within the previous 24 hours. The colored cells enable you to quickly determine the activity per client.The report shows the number of completed jobs that started within the selected time period. These jobs could have a completion status of: successful, failed, or warning.

Client Job Histogram 161


APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 9Chapter 7Media Management Reports

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5This chapter covers the following topics:• Current Media Summary• Tape Media Summary Report• Tape Media Detail Report• HP Data Protector Tape Media Table• NetBackup Tape Media Table• NetWorker Tape Media Table• TSM Tape Media Table

Using Media Management ReportsThe reports in this menu group enable you to manage your backup media inventory. Use the Current Media Summary for an at-a-glance view of the status of the media associated with each of your backup solutions. The pie charts and legends in this report provide drilldown access to the Tape Media Summary report.

Using Media Management Reports 163

Current Media SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Media Management Reports > Current Media SummaryNote: This report does not display Backup Exec media data.

The Current Media Summary is a real-time snapshot of all the media utilized by the backup solutions for servers within the scope of the report. The status types vary for each pie chart because they are directly related to the specific backup solution. So, for example, NetBackup reports expired tapes, while NetWorker indicates which tapes can be recycled. Refer to the backup solution’s reference guides for details about media status types.• Hold your mouse over any of the pie chart sections and a pop-up will display details about

the media of the corresponding status. Similar information is reflected in the chart legend.• Click on any section of the pie chart and/or legend labels to view the Tape Media Summary

report.• Click on the Total Tape Media link to view the Tape Media Summary report.


Tape Media Summary Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Media Management Reports > Tape Media SummaryYou also can access this report from the Operations Dashboard by clicking on the Total Tape Media link in the Current Media Summary.Note: This report does not display Backup Exec media data.

Depending on your environment, this report listing can get rather long, so you may want to narrow the report’s scope. When you generate the report, you can limit the output using the following parameter choices:• Scope: Select specific servers and/or server groups• Event Status: Select All Media, Media Inside Tape Library, or Media Outside Tape Library• Media Status: All, Expired, Available, In Use, or Full

When your Tape Media Summary report contains multiple listings, the sortable headings enable you to find the tape media you want quickly. Click on any of the table headings to sort the table by that heading in ascending order. Click the heading a second time to sort in descending order.

Media ID The tape ID links to the Tape Media DetailServer The management Server links to the Server DetailsProduct The backup product associated with the tape: HP Data Protector,

NetBackup, NetWorker, TSMStatus The tape media status is reported as: Cleaning, Filling, Full,

Unavailable, or Vendor Specific (which indicates the disposition specific to the backup product). Place your mouse pointer on top of Vendor Specific to view the message.

Type Type of tape deviceLibrary Library to which the tape belongsSlot # Physical position in the library

Tape Media Summary Report 165

Tape Media Detail ReportThe Tape Media Detail can be accessed from the Tape Media Summary Report by clicking on the Media or Volume ID.

The details displayed in a Tape Media Detail report are specific to the backup vendor, although some fields are common to all backup products. At the bottom of the Tape Media Detail report, a table lists additional backup event details by node name, session name, or save set—depending on the structure and terminology of the corresponding backup product. These tables are listed by backup product in this section.

Media ID/Volume ID

Either the Media ID or Volume ID

Label The tape labelType/ Media Type

The type of tape media, such as DLT or LTO-Ultrium

Product The backup product using the tape mediaStatus Tape status, such as Scratch, Good, Full, Filling, as reported by the

backup softwarePolicy HP Data Protector policyUsage Allocation

The type of usage allocation

Error State The tape media error state, as reported by the backup softwareAccess Type Access type, such as Read Write or Read Only, as reported by the

backup softwareServer The server managing the job that’s transferring the data to tape

Volume Group NetBackup volume group

Volume Pool NetBackup volume pool

Storage Pool TSM only: Lists the associated Storage Pool

Device Class TSM only: Lists the device class of the tape media

Tape Library The name of the library in which the media resides


HP Data Protector Tape Media TableThis table is displayed for reports that have an HP Data Protector server group scope. For a description of the fields in this table, see “HP Data Protector Session Summary” on page 137.

NetBackup Tape Media TableThe following table is displayed for reports that have a NetBackup server group scope.

Slot Number The media’s location in the library

Estimated Total MB Capacity

See the Estimated Capacity Notes in the User’s Guide and the context-sensitive help.

% Utilized For TSM, the percentage of the media that is in use

% Reclaimable For TSM, the percentage of the media that may be reclaimableWritten MBytes The amount of data written to the media. This field is not displayed

for TSM.Available MBytes/Estimated MBytes Available

The amount of available space on the media. This field is not displayed for TSM.

See Estimated Capacity Notes.

Number of Mounts

Number of times the media was mounted

Number of Write Errors

Number of media write errors

Number of Read Errors

Number of media read errors

Age Limit (months)

HP Data Protector age limit

Initialized Date HP Data Protector initialized dateLast Read Date & time of last readLast Written Date & time of last writeLast Updated Date & time of last updateLast Overwrite Date

Date & time of last overwrite

Backup ID The NetBackup IDClient Client from which the data was copiedBackup Type Type of backup to tape, such as Full or PartialStart Time Date and time the backup to tape beganFinish Time Date and time the backup to tape ended

Tape Media Detail Report 167

NetWorker Tape Media TableThe following table is displayed for reports that have a NetWorker server group scope.

TSM Tape Media TableThe following table is displayed for reports that have a TSM server group scope.

Estimated Capacity NotesEvery time tape data is captured, StorageConsole recalculates the estimated tape capacity for the tape media type and volume pool combination. It takes into consideration the written KBs for the media type and volume pool for full tapes and then stores the average as the estimated tape capacity. Initially, when there is not enough data captured, this value may look low compared to the capacity stated by the vendor.

Expiration Expiration date, if anyWritten MBytes

Amount of data written to tape for this session

Exit Code Exit code associated with the backup job

Save Set NetWorker Save Set nameClient Client from which the data was copiedLevel Type of tape media storage, which could be a level number or text, such

as FullStart Time Start of Save Set writeFinish Time End of Save Set writeExpiration Expiration date, if anyWritten MBytes

Amount of data written to the tape

State Tape media state, such as Browsable or Recoverable

Node Name Name of the TSM node/serverFile Space Name

Name of the TSM file space that was copied to tape

Copy Type Type of transfer to tapeStorage Pool The TSM Storage Pool name# of Files in Stg Pool

Number of files in the TSM storage pool for this node

Stg Pool Phy MBytes

Amount of data in the TSM storage pool for this node

Stg Pool Log MBytes

Size of the TSM storage pool log file


Over time, the estimated capacity improves to the actual number of KBs that is being written to the tapes. Note that the amount of data that fits on the tapes differs based on the compression algorithm used and the type of data that is being backed up, which results in different compression ratios.For NetBackup, some environments freeze or suspend their media and do not allow their tapes to fill to capacity. In this situation, a StorageConsole database table can be updated to override the standard estimated capacity calculation with values for Volume Pool ID, Media Type, and Estimated Capacity. When values are supplied in this table, the NetBackup estimated capacity calculations will first determine the average size of full tapes—by tape type and volume pool. If this value is less than the value provided in the table, the value in the table will be used for the estimated capacity.Refer to the System Administrator’s Guide for details.

Tape Media Detail Report 169


APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 10Chapter 7Backup SLA Reports

This chapter covers the following topics:• Available SLA Reports

Backup Start Time Performance• Backup Start Time SLA Report• Determining and Improving Backup Start Time Performance

Backup Success Performance• Backup Status SLA Report• Determining and Improving Backup Success Performance

Backup Duration Performance• Backup Duration SLA Report• Determining and Improving Backup Duration Performance

171

Available SLA Reports Whether you’re an Administrator in an IT department or an Administrator at a Data Center, you commit a specific level of service to your end-users or customers.Use default SLA reports or create custom reports to provide information that determines if you are satisfying the commitments you made to your users or customers. With access to the Reporting Database, you can configure the metrics upon which the reports are based. Service Level Agreements (SLAs) are typically based on the following metrics:• Backup Start Time Performance• Backup Status Performance• Backup Duration Performance

The reports can provide data to fine-tune your SLA and to determine if you’re meeting your commitments. The more detailed your SLAs, the easier it is to cut costs, in the case of an IT department, or provide competitive SLA pricing, in the case of Data Centers.

Refer to the following SLA reports:• Backup Start Time• Backup Status • Backup Duration


Backup Start Time SLA Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > SLA Reports > Backup Start Time SLAThe Backup Start Time SLA report displays the total number of backups that began within a specific time range of their scheduled start time. Note: This report can be used only for NetBackup, Backup Exec, and TSM start time SLAs.

Use this report to determine what proportion of backups started at their scheduled time, or were delayed and by how long. If jobs are consistently missing their targeted start times, you may need to investigate the feasibility of your current schedule. A delay could be the result of other jobs taking too long or possibly because there are no drives available. To anticipate delays as a result of drive availability, consider using the “Backup Manager Forecasting Reports” on page 199.To determine and improve backup start time performance, see Determining and Improving Backup Start Time Performance.

Backup Start Time SLA Report 173

Determining and Improving Backup Start Time Performance Use the Backup Start Time SLA report to gauge your backup efficiency. The Backup Start Time SLA report consists of a bar chart that provides a visual indicator of how long backups take to complete. Backup completion time is measured in days.After you use this chart to identify the backups that represent poor performance, you can drill down to determine the causes so that you can prevent inefficiencies in the future. Your SLA determines what values represent poor performance vs. excellent performance. However, if you don’t currently have an SLA implemented, strive for Good (31-60 minutes) performance by improving backup jobs with Average to Poor performance.

To determine and improve backup start time performance:

1. Go to the Backup Start Time SLA Report.

2. For each day, observe the number of backups in the bar graph’s y-axis or hold your cursor over the color-coded segments to display the number of backups. Each segment represents 100% of the overall jobs for the day.

Each bar represents a specific day. If no bar appears for a specific day, then either no backup jobs ran that day or no data is available because the Data Collector and the Reporting Database were not installed at that time.

3. Identify the poorly performing jobs and the reasons for the poor performance:

a. Click on the color-coded bar segments that represent poor performance as defined by your SLA, drilling down into the actual jobs. As a general guideline, the Backup Start Time SLA report provides a few metrics:

b. Identify any trends between backup jobs. For example, are the poorly performing backup jobs associated with a particular server?

4. Implement solutions to increase backup start time performance, such as:• Reduce the number of tape mounts.• Increase network speed.• Add additional processors or upgrade existing processors with faster processors.• Increase hard drive speed and size.

Metric PerformanceStarted Within 30 minutes ExcellentStarted Within 31-60 minutes GoodStarted Within 61-120 minutes AverageStarted After 120 minutes Poor

Table 10.1 Performance Metrics


Backup Status SLA Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > SLA Reports > Backup Status SLAUse the Backup Status SLA report to determine backup success performance and to identify backup failures. A typical backup success percentage might be 85%, as indicated by the Successful Backups Goal line shown in the bar chart.

Changing the Success PercentageIf you want to change the success percentage metric, refer to Defining Report Metrics in the APTARE StorageConsole System Administrator’s Guide. To change the percentage, you must have permission to write to the Reporting Database.To determine and improve backup success performance, go to Determining and Improving Backup Success Performance.

Backup Status SLA Report 175

Determining and Improving Backup Success Performance The Backup Status SLA report provides you the ability to drill down into any failed job so that you can identify the cause of the failure. In addition to walking you through this identification process, this procedure provides a checklist to help you improve your backup success performance.

To determine and improve backup success performance:

1. Go to the Backup Status SLA Report.

2. For each day, week, or month, hold your cursor over the triangle icon at the top of each bar to display the success rate. Compare this rate against your SLA.

Each bar represents a specific day. If no bar appears for a specific day, then no backup jobs ran that day.

3. Use the chart to identify any jobs that failed.

4. Identify any trends between failed jobs. For example, are the failed jobs associated with a particular tape drive or disk drive?


Backup Duration SLA Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > SLA Reports > Backup Duration SLAThe Backup Duration SLA report displays the total number of backups that completed within the specific time range.

As you are generating your Backup Duration SLA report, consider the following best practices:• Use a consistent duration so that you can develop and compare data across the same interval. • Create a duration report for each business unit or for each customer. Depending on how your

company stores data, the Administrator can set up server groups for each business unit • If you have different SLAs with different groups of users or customers, create a unique report

for each SLA so that the data doesn’t become skewed. Even if you have the same SLA for all users or customers, consider generating a unique report so that you can share backup duration performance data that is specific to their jobs.

To determine and improve backup duration performance, go to Determining and Improving Backup Duration Performance.

Backup Duration SLA Report 177

Determining and Improving Backup Duration Performance Use the Backup Duration SLA report to gauge your backup environment’s efficiency. The Backup Duration SLA report consists of a bar chart. Backup completion time is measured in days.Many backups run for a long time simply because they work with large amounts of data, not because of poor backup duration performance. However, sometimes a job with poor performance might be the result of a faulty tape drive that causes slow write speeds.After you use this Backup Duration SLA chart to identify the backups that represent poor duration performance, you can drill down to determine if there is a problem. Your service level agreement determines what values represent poor performance. However, if you don’t currently have an SLA implemented, strive for Good (61-120 minutes) performance by improving backup jobs with Average to Poor performance. The Backup Duration SLA report provides the following metrics:

To determine and improve backup duration performance:

1. Go to the Backup Duration SLA Report.

2. For each day, observe the number of backups in the bar graph’s y-axis or hold your cursor over the color-coded segments to display the number of backups.

Each bar represents a specific day. If no bar appears for a specific day, then either no backup jobs ran that day or no data is available because the Data Collector and the Reporting Database were not installed at that time.

3. Identify poorly performing jobs:

a. Click on the color-coded bar segments that represent poor performance, as defined by your SLA, drilling down into the actual jobs. Each segment represents a 100% of the overall jobs for the day.

b. Identify any trends between backup jobs. For example, are the poorly performing backup jobs taking place at a particular time?

4. Implement solutions to increase backup performance, such as:• Back up during a less busy time.• Increase network speed.• Add additional processors or upgrade existing processors.

Metric PerformanceCompleted Within 60 minutes ExcellentCompleted Within 61-120 minutes GoodCompleted Within 121-300 minutes AverageCompleted After 301+ minutes Poor

Table 10.2 Performance Metrics


APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 11Chapter 10Backup Storage Utilization Reports

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5This chapter covers the following topics:• Using Storage Utilization Reports• Disk Usage and Performance Report• Tape Library and Drive Utilization Report• Drive Utilization and Performance Report• Drive Performance Summary Report• TSM Database Utilization• Storage Unit Summary• Storage Unit Detail Report• Storage Unit Event Details• Real Time Library and Drive Status

179

Using Storage Utilization ReportsTo optimize storage utilization and performance, you can:• Identify duplicate backups.• Identify free capacity.• Ensure maximum disk utilization throughput.• Ensure that jobs start on time.• Forecast future storage needs.

A number of practices contribute to storage consumption issues, such as over-provisioning storage and neglecting to deallocate resources. Your data protection strategy should include proactive procedures for reclaiming unused storage. The Portal provides reports to assist you in optimizing storage utilization and performance.


Disk Usage and Performance ReportTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Disk Usage & PerformanceNote: This report is a NetBackup-only report.

Storage Unit Details

The name of the storage unit.

Mgmt Server Details

Click on the Management Server name link to go to the corresponding Server Details Report.

Media Server Details

Click on the Media Server name link to go to the corresponding Server Details page.

Storage Unit File System Info

Each storage unit has an associated pathname that determines where the backups are stored. The report shows both the pathname and the actual file system on which the storage unit resides. If more than one storage unit shares the same file system, the report lists the names of the other storage units.It’s important to know if other storage units share the same file system, since any physical free space on the file system will be shared as one common pool by all the storage units for that file system.Note: The File System Capacity (MB) field is populated only if Discovery has been enabled.

Disk Usage and Performance Report 181

Real-Time Storage Consumption

Shows the amount of data on the Storage Unit for the selected report scope, grouped by expiration period.Mouse-over the pie slices to view the total number of backups associated with the amount of allocated storage.Click on a pie slice to go to the Storage Unit Details Report, which displays a list of all the active backups that fall within the expiration period and are within the report scope.

Backup Volume & Throughput

Each bar in this graph represents the total number of GBytes written to the Storage Unit for backups jobs that completed during the period represented by the bar.Click on a bar to go to the Storage Unit Details Report, which displays a list of all the backups represented by the bar.The dotted line plotted against the secondary y-axis represents the Average Throughput of the backups for the period represented by each bar. The calculation only includes those jobs within the current report scope. The throughput is calculated as follows:

backup volume/(sum of all backup durations in seconds)

Total Disk Usage

Each bar in this graph represents the total amount of space in GBytes occupied by unexpired backups.


Tape Library and Drive Utilization Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Tape Library & Drive UtilizationThe Tape Library and Drive Utilization report displays the average drive utilization against the actual drive utilization for any given time period. Often, this report is used to justify VTL purchases. Identify how many tape drives are writing and for how long. In addition, the Drive Utilization and Performance Report provides insight into the throughput, with drilldowns to drive performance.

This report does not display data from HP Data Protector or Symantec Backup Exec.

1. Library Utilization


3. Pop-up Details

Library Utilization

At the top of each chart, a summary of the library utilization provides a context for the bar chart.


Each bar shows the average amount of time the library drive(s) are being utilized stacked against the actual utilization time. Clicking on any of the bar sections will take you to a Backup Events Report.

Pop-up Details

Mouse-over any of the bars on the chart to launch pop-ups of details.

Tape Library and Drive Utilization Report 183

Storage Unit Detail Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Storage Unit DetailYou also can access this report from the Operations Dashboard by clicking on the File Systems link.Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Operations DashboardThe Storage Unit Detail report provides a comprehensive view of all tape media in each tape library, groups of tape media outside the libraries, and capacity and usage information for disk storage unit file systems.Note: This report does not display data from HP Data Protector or Symantec Backup Exec.

Figure 11.1 Example of the Storage Unit Detail Report

Tape Library Click on a Library name link or the icon to go to the Tape Media Summary report for all media inside the library. In addition, various usage links launch the Tape Media Summary.Each library is accompanied by a media alert thermometer whose color is an indicator of the percentage of GByte availability for all media in the library:

Volume Group

Displays each library or group of tapes outside the library, and each has its own volume group. The media availability for the volume group is represented by a color coded thermometer so it is easy to tell whether there is a healthy amount of media GBytes available for future backups.

Green More than 50% available.

Yellow Less than 50% available.

Red Less than 25% available.


Scratch Pool Media Usage

If there is a designated scratch pool for a Tape Library or Group of Tapes Outside the Library, the report display the scratch pool as a feeder pool to the Volume Pools. Each scratch pool is accompanied by a color-coded scratch pool thermometer that indicates the amount of scratch media available. The value represented is a percentage: the capacity of the scratch media compared to the capacity all media in the library.

Volume Pools When there is a designated scratch pool, this displays all volume pools in that library that are fed by the scratch pool. Otherwise, the general pool is shown. Click on the number of tapes to view the Tape Media Summary report.

Volume Pool Usage

Displays one or more volume pools, depending on how many exist in the library. Each volume pool has a pie chart that shows the % GBytes Free compared to the % GBytes Used. Click on any part of the pie chart or the Free and Used values to go to the Tape Media Summary report for that tape library.

File System Displays details about the disk space of the media server’s file system on which the disk storage units reside. The operating system reports this data. Values of Unknown indicate that the Discovery module is not configured to probe the media servers’ file systems for their physical characteristics.The management server and controlling server also are shown with the file system details.

Storage Unit Usage

Shows the active backups on the Storage Unit grouped by expiration period. Click on a pie slice to go to the Storage Unit Event Details, which displays a list of all the active backups within the particular expiration period.

Storage Unit Detail Report 185

Storage Unit Event DetailsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Storage Unit Detail

Links to the Job Details.

Links to the Server Details.

When the backup job started.

Links to the Job Details.

Date and time of the tape media expiration.

Amount of data written to the Storage Unit.

Number of files written.

Status of the backup job.

Then, in the file system section of the report, click on a pie slice or pie chart legend link.

Backup ID

Client

Start Time

Finish Time

Expiration

MBytes

# of Files

Exit Code


Drive Utilization and Performance Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Drive Utilization & PerformanceThe Drive Utilization and Performance report enables you to view and compare utilization and performance of the tape drives in your environment. By viewing the total aggregate throughput per drive, you can use this information to help you tune your backup policies. Note: This report does not display data from HP Data Protector or Symantec Backup Exec.

Avg KBytes/Sec and Max KBytes/Sec is displayed for every bar during which an event finish time took place. These calculations are available only for periods of time when an event finished. So, if 20 events finish in one of the bar periods, the calculation is based on the average write speed for the total time for all 20 jobs / total bytes written. Likewise, using this example, Max speed would be the maximum of the averages of all 20 jobs.The Portal does not tie into the hardware directly and monitor the actual drive write speeds. Instead, the reports use the data that the Data Collector retrieved from the backup software—including the amount of data written, job duration time, and job completion time—for each job.

Drive Utilization and Performance Report 187

Drive Details

For each drive, listed at the top of each Drive Utilization and Performance Chart:• Drive Name• Drive Type• Tape Library Name• Backup Management ServerClick on the Backup Management Server name to view its Server Details page.

Pop-up Details

Mouse-over any chart bar or line symbol to view the corresponding values.

Drive Summary

Click on the list at the bottom of each chart to go to the Drive Performance Summary Report, which lists all the backup events that took place on that drive for the time period that you specified in the report scope.Additionally, the min, max, and avg KBytes/Sec for the time period are provided at the bottom of the report.

Avg & Max KBytes/Sec

The Avg KBytes/Sec and Max KBytes/Sec is displayed for every bar during which an event completed.If the report shows a bar with utilization but does not have accompanying line symbols, either no backups or restores completed during that time period or the drive was being utilized for another purpose, such as copying a tape to be vaulted.

Local Start and End Times

Each chart displays the utilization and performance of one drive in the system. The start and end time for each chart is localized to the time zone where that drive’s management server is located.For example, if Drive A’s management server is located in the Pacific Standard Time Zone and Drive B’s management server is located in the Eastern Standard Time Zone (3 hours ahead of Drive A’s management server) and you ran the Drive Utilization and Performance Report for the last 12 hours, the Drive A chart’s start and end times would be 3 hours earlier than the chart for Drive B.This start/end time localization enables real time performance comparison between drives, even if they are located in different parts of the world.


Drive Performance Summary Report To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Drive Performance Summary

Links to the Drive Performance Detail.

Lists the drive number.

The drive type label.

The current status of the drive.

The name of the library.

Links to the controlling servers details in a Server Details Report.Total MBytes used. A total for all drives is shown at the bottom of this column.The number of backups that used this drive.

These three values provide indicators of the drive’s performance. The Maximum rate represents the fastest speed that a job ran during the selected time frame. Likewise, the Minimum rate represents the slowest speed that a job ran during the same time frame. For NetBackup specifics, see NetBackup Drive Performance Summary.

This report also can be generated via a link in the Drive Utilization and Performance Report.This report provides high-level drive details for the reporting period that you specified in the report scope.Note: If you are accessing this report from the navigation pane, be sure to define a server group scope that is unique by product type—for example, only NetBackup servers. Also, this report does not display Symantec Backup Exec information.

As an alternative to Server Group scope, you can select Tape Libraries as the scope:

1. In the Drive Performance Summary Report Designer window, click Modify to change the scope.

Drive Name

Drive #

Drive Type

Drive Status

Library Name

Controlling Server

Total MBytes

# of Backups

Min MBytes/Sec

Max MBytes/Sec

Avg MBytes/Sec

Drive Performance Summary Report 189

2. In the Client Selection window, first click Clear All to remove the server groups from the “In scope” window.

3. Click the Tape Library tab to display the list of possible tape libraries in your environment.

4. Double-click the tape libraries to include them in the scope and then click OK.


NetBackup Drive Performance SummaryFor NetBackup jobs, the drive performance algorithm takes into account the use of multiple tapes, as some backups require the dismounting and re-mounting of several tapes. The Kilobytes/second rate is calculated for each piece of tape media used by the backup job.mediaKilobytes / ((finishReadWrite - startReadWrite) * SECS_IN_A_DAY * (mediaKilobytes/jobKilobytes))

Where:• mediaKilobytes is the total kilobytes written to an individual piece of tape media• jobKilobytes is the total size of the backup job, as reported by bpdbjobs• startReadWrite is the date/time that the job started writing to the tape• finishReadWrite is the date/time that the job finished writing to the tape

The Drive Performance Summary report displays the minimum, average, and maximum overall drive performance for all jobs for the reporting period. When you drill down to an individual tape drive, the Drive Performance Detail Report uses this same algorithm to display the performance of each job. If there are multiple rows for a single job, such as when multiple tapes are used by the job, the performance metric is averaged across all the rows returned from the above algorithm. The details from which drive performance is derived can be viewed via drilldown links. In the Drive Performance Detail report, click on the Finish Date for one of the backup jobs to view the Job Details. At the bottom of the Job Details Report, the backup attempts (try records) are displayed.

Drive Performance Summary Report 191

Drive Performance DetailThis report is the result of a drilldown from the Drive Performance Summary Report.To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Drive Performance SummaryThen, click on a Drive Name.

For NetBackup specifics, see NetBackup Drive Performance Summary.

Drive Name The drive name—this was the link to this report from the Drive Performance Summary report.

Library Name The library name links to the Tape Media Summary report.

Client Links to the client’s Server Details Report.

Start Time When the backup job started.

Finish Time Links to the Job Details Report.

Duration Duration of the job.

Status Status of the job.

# of Files The number of files backed up to this drive.

MBytes Amount of data backed up to this drive.

MBytes/Sec

For NetBackup, this value is calculated using the job write start time and job write end time (not the job start time and job finish time). For example, a job can start, but then it can wait in a queue before the job begins to write to a tape/disk. That queue time is eliminated in this calculation.


TSM Database Utilization To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > TSM Database UtilizationThe TSM Database Utilization report provides usage and capacity trending of the TSM database. Using this report, you can determine how much of the allocated database space has been used over the selected report period.


2. Pop-up Details

3. Usage & Availability Trending


Each bar shows the average amount of time the library drive(s) are being utilized stacked against the actual amount of utilization time. Click on any bar section will to view the Backup Events Report.

Pop-up Details

Mouse-over any of the bars on the chart to display pop-ups including the details of that particular bar section.

Usage & Availability Trending

Shows how much of the allocated database space has been utilized within the TSM database over the time period that you specified in the report scope.

TSM Database Utilization 193

TSM Recovery Log UtilizationTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > TSM Recovery Log UtilizationThis report displays TSM Recovery Log usage—both the maximum used and the available capacity. The TSM Recovery Log contains transactions prior to TSM committing them to the database. Use this report to monitor the size of the log to prevent degradation on the TSM server.The data can be displayed either as a bar chart or a tabular report. To select a report type, click on Advanced in the Report Designer.


TSM Recovery Log Utilization 195

Storage Unit SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Storage Unit SummaryThis report is NetBackup-specific.Note: Only the first four tape libraries are displayed.

Library Details Click on the library name or server to view the Storage Unit Detail Report.

File System Details Click on the server name to view the Server Details Report.


Real Time Library and Drive StatusTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Real Time Library and Drive StatusUse this report to monitor the health of each library. This report displays current high-level information for each tape library in your environment. The data will only be as current as the time of the most recent poll of your management server(s).Note: Only NetBackup and Legato NetWorker jobs are supported for this report. Also, the report requires a homogeneous server scope—that is, choose either all NetBackup servers or all Legato servers in your server group scope selection.

Library Library name.Type The type of library, such as Optical or HCART.Management Server

Click this link to view server details.

Slots The number of slots in the library.Drives The number of drives in the library.In Use Number of drives currently in use.Drives Available

Drives - In Use = Drives Available

Down The number of disabled drives. When this number becomes equal to or greater than 25% of the library’s drives, the library’s row of information will be highlighted in red.

Avail % The percentage of drives in this library that are available.

Real Time Library and Drive Status 197


12Chapter 11Backup Manager Forecasting Reports

This chapter covers the following topics:• Forecasting Overview• Media Forecasting Dashboard• Media Availability Forecast• Media Consumption Forecast• Tape Drive Usage and Forecast Report• Scratch Pool Forecast Report• NetBackup Library Capacity Forecast

Forecasting OverviewTo ensure accurate forecasts, the reports make the following decisions:• In order to provide a good statistical sample, when you select a display range, the report uses

historical data that is twice that display range.• If the full range of historical data is unavailable, the data that is available is used. For

example, if you want to view data for January of the previous year to December of the current year, the Portal looks for four years worth of historical data.

• Although the report forecasts the current period, the report ignores the current period when it derives statistical calculations. For example, if the current month is July and you request to view the report by months, the bar for July of this year will be forecasted and data for July of this year will be ignored for statistical calculations.

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

Forecasting Overview 199

Media Forecasting Dashboard To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Media Forecasting DashboardThe Media Forecasting Dashboard displays 14 Days of historical consumption and 7 days of forecasted consumption. This report is NetBackup-specific. Using this dashboard, you can pro-actively manage tape availability.

Media Consumption Forecast

Note: Click on the Total Volume Pools link to display the same chart in a new window. A chart appears for each volume pool within the report scope.The dark blue bars indicate historical consumption while the light blue bars indicate consumption predicted for the next 7 days.In order to forecast the 7 days of usage, the report averages day-of-the-week consumption data for the historical period that you specified in the report scope. In order to forecast the number of tapes consumed each day, the system calculates forecasted consumption by the close of each day using the following algorithm:

1. Tally the Gbyte consumption for all backups written to tape per media type in each volume group.

2. Divide the total GByte consumption for that volume group/media type by the estimated capacity of that media type in that volume group.

Repeat for each volume group/media type instance within the report scope. The chart displays the aggregate tape consumption results using the circular line symbols.


Pop-up Details Mouse-over any of the bars or symbols on the chart to display pop-ups that provide details.

Drillable Bars Click on any historical consumption bar to drill down to the Media Usage Detail Report for that day.

Media Availability Forecast

The Media Availability Forecast plots forecasted consumption against forecasted availability.Note: Click on the Total Volume Pools link to display the same chart in a new window. A chart appears for each volume pool within the report scope.

In order to forecast the number of tapes consumed each day, the system calculates forecasted consumption by the close of each day using the following algorithm:

1. Tally the Gbyte consumption for all backups written to tape per media type in each volume group.

2. Divide the total GByte consumption for that volume group/media type by the estimated capacity of that media type in that volume group.

Repeat for each volume group/media type instance within the report scope. The system calculates the forecasted availability for the close of each day using the following algorithm: previous day’s availability + forecasted media expiration - forecasted consumption

Media Availability Alerts

The circular line symbol tracks the # of tapes available for each day that the report displays. If the number of tapes available drops below the Availability Threshold, the symbol is red. The default for the Availability Threshold is 25, but you can configure this value for each portal instance.

Media Expiration By Tapes & GBytes

Media Expiration is displayed on a by-Tape and by-GByte basis in the first two pie charts.

Note: Click on the Total Volume Pools link to display the same chart in a new window. A chart appears for each volume pool within the report scope.Mouse-over any pie slice to display pop-ups that provide display the data associated with that slice.Click on any of the pie slices or associated legend items to go to the Media Summary report, which shows all the media that expires within the associated time frame. Each piece of media is associated with the slot # as well as the expiration date so that you can easily select and remove media from the library. Each of the Expiration Time Frame Policies defaults to the following:Expire <= 7 DaysExpire <= 30 DaysExpire <= 90 DaysExpire <= 180 DaysExpire > 180 DaysThe Expiration Time Frame Policies are globally configurable parameters for each portal instance.

Media Forecasting Dashboard 201

Real Time Media Status

The pie chart provides a real-time snapshot of all the media that the servers within the report scope are using.

Note: Click on the Total Volume Pools link to display the same chart in a new window. A chart appears for each volume pool within the report scope.• Mouse-over any of the pie chart sections to display pop-ups with pertinent details

about the media of the corresponding status.• Click on any section of the pie chart to go to the Tape Media Summary report for all

media with the corresponding status.• Click on the Total Tape Media link to go to the Tape Media Summary report for all

the servers within the report scope. Scratch & Volume Pools By Media Type

A row for each type of media in each pool (media type/pool instance) within the report scope displays in the Volume Pool Usage Forecast.This report limits the total # of instances to eight. Click on the Total Volume Pools link located at the top right of the component to view a complete report which will include all the media type/pool instances within the report scope.If a scratch pool exists within the report scope, the report displays the scratch pool at the top of the report.If the forecasted consumption for any media type/pool instance exceeds the forecasted availability after the future time period that you selected in the report scope, the row instance is red.


Media Availability ForecastTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Media Availability ForecastThe Media Availability Forecast plots forecasted consumption against forecasted availability. This report is NetBackup-specific.The system calculates the forecasted consumption by the close of each day, using the following algorithm: (previous day’s availability + forecasted media expiration - forecasted consumption)In order to forecast the 7 days of usage, the system averages day-of-the-week consumption data for a historical period specified in the “Historical Data Period” parameter on the Media Forecasting Dashboard Report Designer.When forecasting the number of tapes consumed on each day, the system tallies the Gbyte consumption for all backups written to tape per media type in each volume group. The system then divides the total GByte consumption for that volume group / media type by the estimated capacity of that media type in that volume group. This process is repeated for each volume group / media type instance within the scope of the report and the aggregated tape consumption results are displayed via the circular line symbols in the bar chart.The circular line symbol tracks the # of tapes available for each day displayed on the chart. Place your mouse over each colored portion of a bar to see the following details for the associated time period:• Currently Available Storage Media• Current Consumption• Forecasted Consumption• Forecasted Available• Forecasted Tape Availability (mouse over connected circles at the top of the bars)

Media Availability Forecast 203

Media Consumption ForecastTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Media Consumption ForecastThis report is NetBackup-specific.A bar chart represents historical tape usage, with a projection of future needs. You can select report periods ranging from one week to eight weeks of data. In addition, you can narrow the report scope by choosing specific server groups or even clients within a server group.In order to forecast the seven days of usage, the report averages day-of-the-week consumption data for a historical period specified in the Time Period.In order to forecast the number of tapes consumed on each day, the report tallies the Gbyte consumption for all backups written to tape per media type in each volume group. Then the total GByte consumption for that volume group/media type is divided by the estimated capacity of that media type in that volume group. This process is repeated for each volume group/media type instance within the scope of the report and the aggregated tape consumption results are displayed via the circular line symbols in the bar chart.Note: The current day is treated as the future for the purpose of forecasting.


Media Usage DetailsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Media Consumption ForecastThen, click on a Media Consumed bar in the bar chart.

Click this link to view the Server Details Report.

Click this link to launch the Job Details Report.

The server that is executing the backup policy. Click this link to view the Server Details Report.The name of the volume pool to which the media belongs.

Click on this link to launch the Job Details Report.

The day of the week on which the backup occurred.

Total amount written to the media.

Total number of files written to the media.

Forecasted tape need for the backup job.

Click on these links to launch the Tape Media Detail Report.

Client

Backup ID

Mgmt Server

Volume Pool

Finish Time

Weekday

Total MBytes

Total Files

Estimated Tapes

Tape ID

Media Usage Details 205

Tape Drive Usage and Forecast ReportTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Tape Drive Usage & ForecastThis report does not display data from HP Data Protector or Symantec Backup Exec.Use this report to determine if and when you need to add more tape drives to your libraries. When you customize this report, if you enter a date range in the past, the report will include historical usage information. If your date range includes a finish date beyond the current day, the report will include forecast estimates.Note: The current day is treated as the future for the purpose of forecasting.Tip: When entering the date range in the Report Designer, use a finish date that is a few weeks or months into the future. This will ensure that a sufficient forecast is produced. Also, to produce a realistic forecast, group the data by Weeks, Months, or Quarters. For this type of report, the time units of Hours and Days are too small to provide meaningful charts.

The report derives the forecast by comparing usage with your existing tape inventory. To be safe, use the highest forecast when determining how many tape drives you need to add.For additional information about the tape drives in your environment, use the Tape Library and Drive Utilization report.The Tape Drive Usage and Forecast Report provides the following information:

# of Tapes drives The number of tape drives in all tape libraries for the report scope that you specified.

Usage/Forecast Mouse-over each color of a bar to retrieve the following information:• Average tape drives used previously• Maximum tape drives used previously• Average tape drives forecasted• Maximum tape drives forecasted


Scratch Pool Forecast ReportTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Scratch Pool ForecastThis report does not display data from HP Data Protector or Symantec Backup Exec.A scratch pool is a repository of media that is available to backup servers. There are a few things that affect the availability of media in a scratch pool:• If your backup servers run out of media, they automatically take and use media from the

scratch pool. • If your backup servers delete data, making media available, they automatically add the

recycled media to the scratch pool. • When you clean tapes or expire tapes, you temporarily or permanently affect the pool of

media.Note: The current day is treated as the future for the purpose of forecasting.

Because backup success is tied directly to scratch pools, it’s important that you monitor and forecast media usage in the scratch pools.

The Scratch Tape Usage and Forecast Report provides the following information:

# of Tapes drives The number of tape drives in all tape libraries for the report scope that you specified.

Usage/Forecast Mouse-over each bar to retrieve the following information:• Average scratch tapes used previously• Maximum scratch tape used previously• Average scratch tapes forecasted• Maximum scratch tapes forecasted

Scratch Pool Forecast Report 207

NetBackup Library Capacity ForecastTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Library Capacity ForecastThis report can display either a bar chart view or a tabular report of library capacity, current usage, and forecasted usage. In the Report Designer, select display as Chart or display as Table.Note that in the bar chart, the yellow line represents estimated library capacity. See Estimated Capacity Notes for details.

To view this same data in tabular format, select Display as Table in the Report Designer.


This is the NetBackup Master Server. This links to Server Details.This is the NetBackup media server that controls the library. This links to Server Details.The name of the tape library.

The number of slots in the library.

Serial number of the tape library.

The device’s SCII details.

The date that represents the time period start date.

Average usage, as of the associated date.

Forecasted usage, based on the reports start and end dates

The following table lists fields displayed in either the bar chart or the table.

Management Server

Controlling Server

Library

# of Slots

Serial Number

SCSII Info

Date

Current Usage

Forecasted Usage

NetBackup Library Capacity Forecast 209


APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 13Chapter 11Backup Billing and Usage Reports

This chapter covers the following topics:• Available Billing and Usage Reports• Creating a Billing and Chargeback Policy• Determining Media Chargebacks• Determining Backup Chargebacks

Available Billing and Usage Reports The Billing and Usage reports can be used to determine which business units are using your resources. In addition, you can use these reports to calculate chargeback costs.If you’re in the process of rolling out chargeback policies, consider using these reports as planning tools—to see what impact your policies might have on your business units or customers.However, you need not charge your business units in order to find the Billing and Usage Reports useful. You simply can use the reports to gauge which business units are consuming the majority of your resources.The following Billing and Usage reports are provided:• Billing and Chargeback Summary• Server Consumption Summary

Available Billing and Usage Reports 211

Creating a Billing and Chargeback PolicyThis procedure assumes that your server group hierarchy represents the logical relationships—business units, customers, etc.—on which you want to report.When you set the per-GB and per-tape usage costs, you do so at the server group level. Therefore, child server group policies take precedence over parent groups. If a parent server group (Group A) has a billing and usage policy set at $0.50/Gbyte and $35.00/Tape and a child server group (Group B) has a usage policy set at $0.55/Gbyte and $40.00/Tape, the servers contained in Group B would be billed at $0.55/Gbyte and $40.00/Tape rather than the billing rate of the parent group.When StorageConsole discovers that there is no policy set for any given group, it traverses the server group hierarchy looking for a policy in a parent group until it finds a billing and usage policy to use. If the application cannot find any policy as it searches up the server group hierarchy, a value of $0.00 will be assigned for both per-GB and per-tape usage.

To add a new billing policy for a server group:

1. From the Portal toolbar, choose Admin > Billing and Usage Policies.

The Billing and Chargeback Administration window appears.2. Click Add.

The Billing and Chargeback Policy Administration window appears.3. Select a Server Group name to which the policy will apply.

Note that a policy set at any particular server group will be assumed by all child server groups that do not have a policy.

4. Enter values for Cost Per GByte, Cost Per Tape, and Cost per Duplicated GB and then click OK.

Cost Per GByte

The amount each server within the server group should be billed per GB of disk space consumed. The acceptable range is from $0.0001 - $999.9999.

Cost Per Tape

The amount each server within the server group should be billed per tape drive consumed. The acceptable range is from $0.0001 - $999.9999.

Cost Per Dup’d GB

The amount each server within the server group should be billed per duplicated consumption. The acceptable range is from $0.0001 - $999.9999.


Determining Media Chargebacks

The Billing and Chargeback Summary report provides a line item of each client’s tape consumption. The Billing Summary Report calculates the chargeback based on billing and usage policies as outlined in Creating a Billing and Chargeback Policy.The report displays data based on the servers. This procedure assumes that you know which business units own specific servers.There are a couple of limitations to the billing and chargeback reports:• The report does not consider shared tape usage. If Client A wrote to tapes 1, 2 and 3, the

report shows charges for the client for those three tapes. If Client B also wrote to tapes 1 and 2, the report lists charges for that client for those two tapes. Therefore, if both Client A and Client B belong to the same business unit, they are billed twice for two of the three tapes.

• The report always uses the current cost of a tape. If the cost changes and you generate a new report, the report reflects the new cost. However, if you run an old report from a year ago, it would also pick up the new cost and therefore not be the same as the original report. Therefore, before you change the unit cost, generate and export previous reports for comparison.

To determine chargebacks for a business unit or customer:

1. Go to the Billing and Chargeback Summary report.

Each client server row contains subtotals for GB and tape consumption.2. To limit the data to a single business unit or department, modify the scope of the Billing and

Chargeback Summary report.

3. Check the value in the Total Cost field, which appears at the right of the table. This value is the total charge to the business unit or customer.

4. If you want to itemize your chargebacks for your business unit/customer, consider the individual costs that comprise the total.

If you feel that the chargebacks are not accurate, do the following:• Verify that the billing and chargeback policies are accurate. Go to Creating a Billing and

Chargeback Policy.• Ensure that the server group does not contain clients that belong to another business unit or

customer.

Determining Media Chargebacks 213

Determining Backup ChargebacksThe Server Consumption Summary report displays backup consumption and the number of backup files captured for all servers that you specify. The report includes backups that were successful and those that have warnings. It does not include failed backups.

To determine server consumption chargebacks:

1. Go to the Server Consumption Summary report.

Servers that do not have any consumption or backups for the period that you specified, do not appear in the report.

2. Drill down into the clients, management servers, or backups to get more detail.

3. If you have an ERP system, export the data to your ERP software. Go to Exporting Reports.


Billing and Chargeback SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Billing and Usage Reports > Billing & Chargeback SummaryTip: To limit the data to a single business unit or department, modify the scope of this report.

The usage and billing details are listed in a table, which you can sort by column headers.

Note: If the scope of this report is for NetBackup-only server groups, three additional columns will be included: Total Dup (GB), Cost Per Dup’d GB, and Dup’d Usage Cost GB, which are set in the Billing and Usage Policies.

To view or modify billing and chargeback items, go to Admin > Billing and Usage Policies.

Client Server The External Name. Click this link to access Server Details.Business Unit/Department

The full pathname of the server group.

Billing and Chargeback Summary 215

Backed UpThe amount of storage consumed by the client server during the specified time period.Click this link to view a Job Summary report.

Cost Per GB Amount the client is charged per GB of consumption.GB Usage Cost Backed Up * Cost per GB = GB Usage Cost

# of TapesThe # of tapes consumed by the client during the specified time period.Click this link to view a Job Summary report.

Cost Per Tape Amount the client is charged per tape consumed.Total Tape Cost # of Tapes * Cost per Tape = Total Tape CostTotal Dup (GB) Total duplicated storage (NetBackup-only scope)

Cost per Dup’d GB The charge that has been configured for duplicated storage (NetBackup-only scope)

Dup’d Usage Cost Total Dup * Cost per Dup’d = Dup’d Usage Cost (NetBackup-only scope)

Total Cost GB Usage Cost + Total Tape Cost = Total Cost


Server Consumption SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Billing and Usage Reports > Server Consumption SummaryThe consumption details are listed in a table, which you can sort by column headers. If you are in a large enterprise, this table can get unwieldy, so consider modifying the scope to filter the data by server group. By default, the report lists clients in descending consumption order, with the heaviest consumer at the top. The following algorithm determines total consumption:total disk backup + total tape backup = total consumptionTip: Sort the data by Tape Backup or Disk Backup to identify heaviest storage device consumers.

The fields are self-explanatory, so they are not described in this section.Use the following links to access additional details:Link Report GeneratedClient Server Details ReportServer Server Details ReportLast Backup Job Details ReportDisk Backup Job Summary ReportTape Backup Job Summary Report

Client The client name. IP Address IP address of the clientServer Backup server

Server Consumption Summary 217

Backup Product Backup product used to backup the client dataLast Backup Date and time of the last backup eventDisk Backup MBytes

Amount of data backed up to disk

Disk Backup Files Number of files backed up to diskTape Backup MBytes

Amount of data backed up to tape

Tape Backup Files Number of files backed up to tapeNumber of Taps Number of tapes used for the backup


APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 14Chapter 11Backup Policies Reports

This chapter covers the following topics:• NetBackup Policy• TSM Policy Domains• NetWorker Groups• HP Data Protector Backup Specification Summary• HP Data Protector Backup Specification Detail

NetBackup PolicyTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Backup Policies > NetBackup PoliciesThis report provides the details of the underlying NetBackup Policies that have been defined for your environment.

Management Server The server that is executing the backup policy. Click this link to view the Server Details Report.

Policy Name Name assigned to this policy. Click this link to access the Backup Policy Details report.

Type Indicates the specific components it is managing—for example, MS-SQL server, Oracle, NDMP, MS-Windows.

Storage Unit The name of the storage unit.

Volume Pool The name of the volume pool to which the media belongs.

NetBackup Policy 219

Backup Policy DetailsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Backup Policies > NetBackup PoliciesThen, click on the Policy Name.The Policy Details include not only a list of clients covered by the policy, but also the scheduling details. Often the list of clients is long, so you’ll need to scroll to the bottom of the report to see the scheduling details.

# of Clients # of clients being backed up.

Status The backup status code returned by NetBackup.


Policy Details This section includes details that are found in the NetBackup Policy page. In addition, the following Yes/No indicators reflect the current policy set-tings:• Follow NFS Mount Points • Cross Mount Point • Client Encryption • Client Compress • Priority • Keyword• Max Jobs Per Policy• Multiple Streams

Client Details • Client - The Client name.• Last Backup - Date of the last backup job.• Backups this Month - Number of backup jobs for the current month.• Written this Month - Amount of data backed up for the current month.• Management Server - The Server responsible for backups.• Product Type - Backup solution product name.• Make/Model & OS - Client’s details, if known.

NetBackup Policy 221

TSM Policy DomainsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Backup Policies > TSM Policy DomainsThis report is specific to IBM Tivoli Storage Manager.

Instance Name The policy instance.

Domain Name A backup group of file systems and drives. Click this link to access the Policy Domain Details.

Description The domain’s description.

Activated Management Class

A management class is a policy object that users can bind to each file to specify how the server manages the file. The management class can contain a backup copy group, an archive copy group, and space management attributes. A copy group determines how the TSM server manages backup versions or archived copies of the file. The space management attributes determine whether the file is eligible for migration by the space manager client to server storage, and under what conditions the file will be migrated.

Backup Retention Days

If a TSM management class is deleted, files that were associated with it need to rebind to another management class. TSM will keep the backup files for a specified number of days until the server is able to rebind the files to an appropriate management class. After this period, the files will no longer be retained. Retention details are defined in the TSM copy group and default retention grace periods for the domain.

Archive Retention Days

If a TSM management class is deleted, files that were associated with it need to rebind to another management class. TSM will keep the archived files for a specified number of days until the server is able to rebind the files to an appropriate management class. After this period, the files will no longer be retained.

Number of Nodes The number of file servers registered with the TSM server.

Active When the instance became active.


Policy Domain DetailsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Backup Policies > TSM Policy DomainsThen, click on a Domain Name.

A Policy Set is an object that contains a group of management class definitions that exist for a policy domain. Several policy sets can exist within a policy domain, but only one policy set can be active at a time.

TSM Policy Domains 223

NetWorker GroupsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Backup Policies > NetWorker Groups

The EMC NetWorker server that is managing the backups for the associated group. Click on this link to access server details.A group of clients to be backed up. Click this name to view the list of client instances in the Group Detail report.If Autostart is Enabled, the group will begin being backed up at this time.The frequency with which autostart will initiate backups.

This attribute indicates if the group will be backed up automatically for each time period specified as the interval. Values include: E = Enabled, which means clients will be backed up automatically at the time specified in Start Time; D = Disabled; S = Start now, which means that clients are backed up immediately, overriding the start time.NetWorker allows you to override a scheduled backup by selecting a default group and initiating a Start Now autostart.Backup Status for the group can be one of the following: Running, Idle, Finished, Not Finished (backup exited without completing), Preview Run (test a backup configuration)

EMC NetWorker provides a Group resource to automate backups on a group-by-group basis. By setting up groups, you can manage the load on backup servers.

Server

Group Name

Start Time

Interval

Autostart

Schedule Override

Status


Group DetailTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Backup Policies > NetWorker GroupsThen, click on a Group Name.A NetWorker Group provides the mechanism for establishing which clients will be backed up together and then scheduled for their backups. This report displays the NetWorker Group Control details.

The following NetWorker-specific details are provided in this report.

Group Name A group of clients to be backed up.

Schedule Override NetWorker allows you to override a scheduled backup by selecting a default group and initiating a Start Now autostart.

Start Time When the group backup is scheduled to begin.

Override LevelOverride levels can be configured for a specific date in a NetWorker backup schedule, enabling you to override the backup level setting for every client in that group.

Auto-Start When enabled, this attribute triggers regularly scheduled backups.

Interval The frequency with which autostart will initiate backups.

StatusBackup Status for the group can be one of the following: Running, Idle, Finished, Not Finished (backup exited without completing), Preview Run (test a backup configuration)

Force Incremental

When this field is set to Yes, if two full backups start within a 24-hour period, NetWorker forces the second one to be an incremental backup. (for an interval attribute of less than 24 hours)

NetWorker Groups 225

Last Start/End The last time the group started/ended a save operation.

Duration Duration of the last group save.

Clones & Clone Pool

NetWorker uses a cloning process to make copies of saved data. In addition to copying the data, NetWorker keeps track of the details of the cloning operation in a client file index and in the media database. When the Clones attribute is set to Yes, NetWorker automatically clones a save set whenever it is backed up. The Clone Pool indicates where the clones are sent.

Auto Restart This restart attribute indicates if a group should be automatically restarted after an incomplete save operation.

Success Threshold Indicates the success or failure of the groups save set operations.

Client Retries

You can configure NetWorker to be persistent in cases where a client may be hung. Based on the Client Retries value, NetWorker will make multiple attempts at backing up a client before it moves on to other clients.

Inactivity Time-out The inactivity (in minutes) before NetWorker determines that the client is hung.

Save Group Parallelism

The NetWorker server can perform simultaneous backups in either of the following ways:multiple save sets from multiple clientsmultiple save sets from a single client.

Client Instance Name Click on this link to access the Client Instance Detail report.

Scheduled Backup Indicates if there is a backup scheduled

Schedule Schedule description

Last Successful Backup

Click on this link to access the Job Details Report.

Comment Comments related to the schedule


Client Instance DetailTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Backup Policies > NetWorker GroupsThen, click on a Group Name and then click on a Client Instance Name.

NetWorker Groups 227

HP Data Protector Backup Specification SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Backup Policies > HP DP Backup SpecificationThe HP Data Protector Backup Specification report lists the Backup Specification, with the objects that are backed up, the servers and the next time the backup will be performed. Note that the objects can be entire disks or volumes, or sub-sets of these, such as directories or the Windows Registry.

Specification Links to the HP Data Protector Backup Specification DetailServer Backup serverObject Type The type of data for which the backup specification is

configured—database entity or a disk image (raw disk)—for example, filesystem.

# of Clients Number of clients backed up by this backup specificationNext Backup Mode Full, Incr, Incr 1, Incr 2, Incr 3, Incr 4, Incr 5, Incr 6, Incr 7, Incr

8, Incr 9Next Backup Date Date and time of the next backup


HP Data Protector Backup Specification DetailTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Backup Manager > Backup Policies > HP DP Backup SpecificationThen, click on a Specification link.The HP Data Protector Backup Specification Detail report lists the details of the specification, such as mount points and clients. Each of the media must be in a media pool.

Specification Specification NameObject Type The type of data for which the backup specification is

configured—database entity or a disk image (raw disk)—for example, filesystem.

Next Backup Mode Full, Incr, Incr 1, Incr 2, Incr 3, Incr 4, Incr 5, Incr 6, Incr 7, Incr 8, Incr 9

Next Backup Date Date and time stamp of the next backup

HP Data Protector Backup Specification Summary 229

Object’s Latest Backup and Not Configured File SystemsA table lists the mount points, with the scheduled backup type, media pool, and last full & incremental backup dates.

A mount point provides the access to the directory structure for a disk or logical volume on the client, to locate the backup object.The client links to the Mount Point DetailsType of backup that is scheduled next, for example, FullThe media pool in which this data was storedDate and time of the last full backup for this mount pointDate and time of the last incremental backup for this mount point

Not Configured File Systems

Mount points listed in the “Not Configured Filesystems” table indicate mount points that are not backed up.The name of the server

Backup Specification SchedulesA table lists the backup specification schedules, if any: Mode and Schedule Time

Pre Exec Script Name

Pre-execution script name

Post Exec Script Name

Post-execution script name

Status The current status of the specification

Mount Point

ClientNext Backup ModeMedia PoolLast Full BackupLast Incr Backup

Mount Point

External Name


APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 15Chapter 11Capacity Manager Reports

Capacity Manager provides insight into storage users, over-consumption, and under-utilized storage. These reports provide end-to-end storage capacity reporting: both a host-to-array view and an array-to-host view.This chapter covers the following topics:• Overview of the Enterprise Storage Provisioning Process• Overview of Capacity Manager Reports• Why Capacity Manager?• Capacity Manager Reports• Capacity Manager Quick-Start List• Application Capacity & Utilization• Array Capacity and Utilization• List Array Groups• Host Capacity & Utilization• Host Utilization Detail• LUN Utilization Summary• Array Group Details• Array Port Utilization• Array Capacity Forecast• Host Capacity Forecast• Applications At Risk• Over-Provisioned Applications• Application Storage Dashboard• Available/Reclaimable Storage• Capacity Chargeback and Billing• LUNs At Risk• Over-Provisioned LUNs• Hosts at Risk• Over-Provisioned Hosts

In addition, a set of NetApp-specific reports comes packaged with Capacity Manager. These reports are described in NetApp Capacity Reports. A set of reports, specific to the IBM 6000 & 8000 Series, is also available, described in IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports.For an overview of how Capacity Manager works, see the Getting Started Guide for Administrators.

231

Overview of the Enterprise Storage Provisioning ProcessThe following example of the provisioning process provides insight into how storage can disappear from an enterprise radar screen, causing inefficient use of existing storage and ineffective planning for future requirements.

1. A department requests storage from the provisioning team.

Often the request for storage occurs months before a project’s servers go online. And, often the request exceeds the true need.

2. The provisioning team sets up a LUN and assigns it to a host.

The LUN is not yet available for mounting file systems on the host.3. The storage allocation ticket is handed off to the group that will manage the host.

Often the storage requestor is not the owner of the host.4. The system administrator must perform a LUN scan or a system re-boot in order for the

host to be able to see the LUN. Often, this is the step that doesn’t get done.


Overview of Capacity Manager ReportsCapacity Manager reports provide insight into the variance between allocated and used storage, along with predictive analysis of future needs. See also, Overview of the Enterprise Storage Provisioning Process.

Why Capacity Manager?

Drive efficient utilization of network storage• Reclaim unused storage• Reduce annual storage management costs• Defer, reduce, or cancel storage acquisitions• Track storage utilization automatically, instead of manually updating spreadsheets that are

out-of-date each day

Access application-centric metrics• Metrics provide insight into not only host and storage array usage, but also application usage• Applications use storage, not hosts

Capacity Manager ReportsThe following table provides a summary of the Capacity Manager reports that can be accessed from the Menu Groups at the left of the Portal window. Each report is described in detail in subsequent sections. In addition, a recommended get-acquainted report sequence is provided in the Capacity Manager Quick-Start List.

Menu Groups & Reports Descriptions

Storage Capacity & Utilization

Array Capacity and Utilization Overview of storage array capacity and utilization. Use this report to identify storage arrays that are under-utilized. Drill down to the List Array Groups page to view details about each of the array groups associated with a storage array.

Host Capacity & Utilization Overview of host utilization. Drill down to details in the Host Utilization Detail.Without these reports, you would need to access each host to gather the details.

LUN Utilization Summary If LUNs are not being used efficiently, you want to know so that you can change their size or reassign them altogether. View all the LUN mapping details, such as mount points and file systems. Drill down to the Array Group Details to view all the LUNs and the physical devices associated with the selected array group. This report can be filtered to display the following subsets of LUN data:• Allocated, but unused • Allocated, but undiscovered • Unallocated

Overview of Capacity Manager Reports 233

Array Port Utilization Lists the physical/logical port connections between the host’s HBA and the storage array. Use this report to troubleshoot connectivity issues and to re-configure when hosts or arrays are taken out of service. In addition, this report provides information you can use to manage load-balancing across array ports.

Host HBA Summary Lists HBA details by host.

NetApp Aggregate Summary Summary of how physical aggregates are configured to manage disks, RAID groups, and plexes. See NetApp Capacity Reports.

NetApp Volume Summary Summary of the logical volume with links to the associated QTree, LUN, and Snapshot details. See NetApp Capacity Reports.

NetApp NFS Summary Lists the volumes that are exported via NFS. See NetApp Capacity Reports.

NetApp CIFS Summary Lists the volumes that have been exported to Windows hosts via CIFS shares. See NetApp Capacity Reports.

QTree Summary Summary of the quota management configurations. See NetApp Capacity Reports.

NetApp Snapshot Summary Lists snapshot details for the time report’s time interval. See NetApp Capacity Reports.

NetApp Disk Summary Lists the disk within a storage system. See NetApp Capacity Reports.

IBM Array Site Summary Lists IBM Array Sites with drilldowns to details. See IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports.

IBM Array Summary Summary of Array capacity with drilldowns to Array, Array Site, and Rank capacity details. See IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports.

IBM Rank Summary Summary of IBM Ranks with drilldowns to details. See IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports.

IBM Extent Pool Summary Summary of IBM Extent Pools with drilldowns to details. See IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports.

IBM Disk Summary Summary of the physical disks with associated array and array site information. See IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports.

Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Summary

Summary of the Dynamic Provision Pool capacity details. See HDS Dynamic Provisioning Reports.

Hitachi Disk Summary See HDS Dynamic Provisioning Reports.

Storage Capacity & Forecast

Array Capacity Forecast Project growth in storage usage. You can generate the report by the following criteria:• Historical date range• Forecast horizon (date range)• Storage Array Group• Forecast by Array Capacity or LUN Capacity


Host Capacity Forecast At-a-glance overview of historical and predicted usage—from the host’s perspective. You can narrow the scope of this report by specifying a storage type filter of: SAN, DAS, or NAS.

Available or Reclaimable Storage

Array Utilization Dashboard Provides utilization statistics for Hitachi, EMC Symmetrix, and NetApp storage arrays.

Array Utilization Summary Displays a summary listing of each array’s capacity and usage.

Allocated but Unused LUNs Lists LUNs that were discovered by the host, but no volumes have been created from the LUNs.

Allocated but Undiscovered LUNs Lists LUNs for which the host has no knowledge. These LUNs have storage paths, but have no knowledge of the disks, partitions, or volume groups on the hosts associated with those storage paths.

Unallocated LUNs Lists LUNs that are not allocated to any hosts. These LUNs have no storage paths.

Suspected De-provisioned Hosts Storage often is allocated from a storage array and provisioned to a host, but when that host is re-assigned or de-provisioned, the storage remains unused. This report list hosts that are candidates for re-assignment.

Unused Partitions/Logical Volumes This report lists logical volumes created from disks or volume groups, but no file systems have been create on these logical volumes.

Unused Disks/Volume Groups This report provides insight into wasted space on hosts. It displays the total volume group and disk capacity, along with used and available capacity.

Application Capacity & Utilization

Applications At Risk Identify applications that are at risk of running out of storage space.

Over-Provisioned Applications Identify applications that are at risk of having over-provisioned storage—resulting in wasted storage.

Application Storage Dashboard This report essentially interrogates the application to identify what storage is free. The table has three main sections of information: Application Storage, File System Storage, and Array Storage. Expand a listed application to see sub-components.

Chargeback and Billing

Capacity Chargeback By Host View usage and user-defined chargeback/billing by host.

Chargeback Policy Capacity View a list of capacity associated with capacity chargeback policies.

Capacity At Risk

LUNs At Risk LUNs at risk are determined by evaluating current and projected usage.


Over-Provisioned LUNs Over-provisioning leads to increased costs unless you reclaim the space. Use this report to find wasted space—at the file system or mount point level. LUNs that appear on this list have storage allocated to hosts that are not fully utilizing that storage. Since this report shows over-provisioning, the list will show usage that has not reached the specified threshold.

Hosts at Risk This report lists only the hosts that require your immediate attention. Use the host link to drill down to particulars. Select a capacity threshold: Low, Warning, Critical.

Over-Provisioned Hosts Determine which hosts are over-provisioned. Reclaim the space before committing resources to acquire additional storage.

NetApp Aggregates at Risk For thin provisioning, this report lists host usage that is about to exceed the storage that was promised.

NetApp Volumes at Risk Lists thin-provisioned volumes that may be at risk of over-commitment.


Capacity Manager Quick-Start ListUse the following sequence of selected reports to become acquainted with the details that support your capacity management process. This quick-start list provides a brief preview of the capacity optimization that can be achieved using Capacity Manager.Note: Keep in mind that in an enterprise, multiple teams have various responsibilities in the storage provisioning process—providing ample opportunities for storage to drop out of sight.

Capacity Manager Reports Focus your attention on:1. LUN Utilization Summary • Generate this report by selecting one or more storage

arrays. Then, expand/contract a row to view the mount point details. See LUN Utilization Summary.

• Then, generate this report again and in the Report Designer window, select the LUN status of: Allocated but undiscovered. Note that in this version of the report, mount point details are missing because the storage has been allocated, but has not yet been discovered and therefore it cannot be used by an application. This same report is available as: Allocated but Undiscovered LUNs.

2. Host Capacity & Utilization • Without this report, an administrator would have to touch every host to gather information. This report, along with the Host Utilization Detail report, replaces manually created spreadsheets for tracking host usage.

• Click a host link to view the Host Utilization Detail report.3. Host Utilization Detail • Access this report from a host link in the Host Capacity &

Utilization report.• Expand the Volume Group Details (click on the +) to

identify unallocated space in a Volume Group and logical volumes that are not being used by hosts. These details highlight inefficient use of storage.

• Expand the Disk Details (click on the +) to view the raw disk paths, storage types, and LUNs associated with disks.

4. Over-Provisioned LUNs • Use this report to identify LUNs that have been allocated, but the storage is not being used by the host.

• Click a host link to view the Host Utilization Detail report.5. Array Capacity and Utilization • Focus on the two columns at the right of this report—

RAID Group Capacity and LUN Capacity— and their corresponding usage thermometers. If you have NetApp storage, view Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View).

6. Applications At Risk • Identify which applications are expected to exceed storage capacity and when.


Array Capacity and UtilizationTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationUse this report to identify storage arrays that are underutilized or highly utilized. For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.Several versions of this report display data relevant to the type of storage:• NetApp - Because NetApp utilizes a number of unique constructs—such as Aggregates and

Volumes—to organize and access its storage, additional NetApp-specific data is available via this report. For information about the NetApp-specific version of this report, see Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View).

• HDS Dynamic Provisioning - View details related to Dynamic Provisioning Pools via the Array Capacity & Utilization (HDP View).

• IBM Arrays - View array details, including Extent Pool, Array Site, and Rank capacity via the Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Enterprise Array View).

• Other Storage Arrays - The information from all other storage array types is displayed in the format shown below.

Figure 15.1 Example of an Array Capacity & Utilization Report

The report is organized into four columns:

1. Array Summary


2. Raw Capacity - Raw capacity is the summation of the physical disks. Usable space is the space that is calculated from RAID groups and LUNs.

3. RAID Group Capacity or Aggregate/Volume Capacity (for NetApp storage)

4. LUN Capacity

Array Summary

The name that you assigned to the array. Available values include all supported storage devices. From here you can drill down to the array. For a list of supported devices, see the APTARE StorageConsole Certified Configurations Guide.The family classification of the storage array as assigned by the vendor. Use this name to ascertain the vendor’s product specifications.The specific model of the storage array.

The name of the vendor that distributes the storage array.

The name of the product, typically shown as a series number. This field provides an indicator of capacity specifications, such as LUNs, hosts per array, and drives per array.This is the total number of unique hosts that have LUNs assigned by this storage array, and the hosts have been successfully queried using one or more host resource policies. If zero, host resources data has not been collected. Click on the Hosts link to go to the Host Capacity & Utilization.The number of ports in the array. Click on this link to view the Array Port Utilization.Links to the LUN Utilization Summary.

The array information can be used to reference the array vendor’s capacity limits.

Storage Array

Family

Type

Vendor

Product

# Hosts

# Ports

Host Usage

Array Capacity and Utilization 239

Raw CapacityThis column of information summarizes capacity and usage. The percentages, in particular, capture the essence of your current utilization status.NOTE: When calculating capacity, Capacity Manager makes requests to the Device Manager for physical devices (PDEVs) for all Array Groups in a storage array.

Capacity

For EMC Symmetrix arrays: Sum of the capacity of all physical disks from all array groups—no spares. Note: When viewing raw capacity in EMC Control Center, disk group 0 (hot spares) is not included in the total capacity calculation—accounting for the difference between the EMC and Capacity Manager reported capacity values. For EMC CLARiiON arrays: Sum of the capacity of all physical disks from all array groups—including spares (drives that are not allocated to an array group) For HDS arrays: Sum of capacity of all PDEVs from all array groups. Capacity Manager assumes that all PDEVs are part of an array group, so PDEVs that are marked as “not included in an array group” (-1) are included in the capacity calculation. That is, no disks are treated as spares.

Allocated Size

Total raw capacity of the LUNs in the array that have been mapped to a host. These LUNs are typically configured as volumes on the host and dedicated to an application.Unallocated storage is storage that is not part of an Array Group.

Available Size

Total raw capacity of the array that has not been carved into a RAID group. The size is displayed in the units you selected with the Advanced option when you generated the report.

% Available

Expressed as a percentage, total capacity of the LUNs in the array that have not been assigned to a host and that are available for provisioning. This percentage is a better capacity indicator than the number shown as Available Size.

Raw Usage Expressed as a percentage, total capacity of the LUNs in the array that have been assigned to a host and that are not available for provisioning.


RAID Group CapacityThe RAID Group information can be used to identify array group statistics.

LUN CapacitySeveral LUN fields enable drill-down access to additional details so that you can determine the capacity of each configured LUN.

# RAID Groups The number of array groups in the storage array. Links to List Array Groups.

RAID Groups Capacity Total capacity of the array groups in the storage array.

Local Capacity All the capacity from the attached disks

Virtual Capacity

Applicable to HDS arrays only - Capacity from a back-end system, derived from daisy-chained external storage (back-end systems). This is array group capacity that does not have PDEVs in the storage array.

RAID Groups Used Total used capacity of the array groups (by LUNs) in the storage array.

RAID Groups Available Available capacity of the array groups in the storage array.

RAID Group Usage Thermometer with mouse-over that displays the percentage used

# LUNs The number of LUNs that have been created on the array. Click on the Used link or the LUN link to go to the LUN Utilization Summary Report.

Total LUN Capacity

The total capacity for the LUNs.

# Open Allocated LUNs

For Hitachi arrays, the number of open allocated LUNs links to the LUN Utilization Summary.

Open Alloc LUN Capacity

For Hitachi arrays, the total capacity of the open allocated LUNs.

# Allocated LUNs

The number of LUNs on the array that have been mapped to a host. These LUNs are typically configured as volumes on the host and dedicated to an application. storage array --> array port --> host storage domain --> HBA port --> host

Click on the Allocated LUNs link or the LUN link to go to the LUN Utilization Summary Report.

Allocated LUN Capacity

The total storage capacity for the allocated LUNs.

UnAllocated LUNs

The number of LUNs that have yet to be allocated.

Array Capacity and Utilization 241

List Array GroupsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationThen, click the # RAID Groups link.This report provides a summary of each of the array groups associated with a storage array, with drilldowns to additional details.

UnAllocated LUN Capacity

The available LUN capacity.

LUN Usage Thermometer with mouse-over that displays the percentage allocated

Group # The number of the array groupGroup Name The name of the array group, which links to Array Group

Details.Storage Array The array name links to the Array Capacity and Utilization.Chassis Number The chassis to which the group belongs.RAID Type RAID typeTotal Capacity Total storage capacity of the group.Allocated Capacity Allocated storage capacityFree Capacity Available storage


Host Capacity & Utilization To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Host Capacity & UtilizationUse the Host Capacity and Utilization report to view an overview of host utilization to determine if there’s contention for storage.Typically, once you’ve reviewed this high-level report, you’ll want to access the details reported by the Host Utilization Detail.

Host The name of the host utilizing the storage. Click on a Host name link to view the Host Utilization Detail.

# of Allocated LUNs The number of LUNs that have been allocated to this host. Click on this number to launch the LUN Utilization Summary.

Allocated Capacity The total capacity of all Volumes both free and used that has been given to the host. When there is a significant discrepancy between the Allocated Capacity and the Seen by Host, it is an indication that there may be storage that can be reclaimable.

# of Used LUNs LUNs that are currently used by the host. Click on this number to launch the LUN Utilization Summary.

Seen by Host The sum of all SAN capacity actually deployed or accepted by the host. This is the storage that the host has been allocated and is using—but this use could be as simple as adding the storage to a volume group. It does not mean that the server has that storage mounted. Mounted storage is reflected in Volume Capacity: DAS/SAN.

# of Arrays The total arrays associated with this host. Click on the number to launch the Array Capacity and Utilization.

Related Hosts Hosts that are related to this host via clustering—they have multipathing to the same LUNs for failover.

# Volumes: SAN/DAS The number of SAN/DAS volumes created from the allocated LUNs

Host Capacity & Utilization 243

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dynamic_Multipathing

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

# of Volumes: NAS The number of NAS volumes created from the allocated LUNs

# of Volumes at Risk The number of host volumes that are at risk of reaching capacity, based on configured thresholds. Click on the number link to view the Host Utilization Detail.

Volume Capacity: DAS/SAN

Total DAS/SAN storage capacity for this host

Volume Capacity: NAS

Total NAS storage capacity for this host

Volume Usage: DAS/SAN

This is the actual amount of SAN/DAS storage used by the host

Volume Usage: NAS This is the actual amount of NAS storage used by the host


Host Utilization DetailTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Host Capacity & UtilizationThen, drill down to the details.Click a # of Volumes at Risk link.In addition, this report can be accessed from several other reports via drill-down links, as shown in the following table:

Use this Host Utilization Detail report to quickly determine critical capacity issues. In particular, focus on the % Available column to find specific at-risk volumes. When a host falls below the designated threshold, the data in the % Available column displays in a different color to call your attention to the problem.

Figure 15.2 Host Utilization Detail (Overview)

From this Report: Click this Link:LUN Utilization Summary HostHost Utilization Summary HostArray Port Utilization HostLUNs At Risk HostHosts At Risk Name

Host Utilization Detail 245

Figure 15.3 Host Utilization Detail (Part 1)

Figure 15.4 Host Utilization Detail (Part 2)


Host Details

Host name links to server details

Physical location of the host, if available

Last time the data was collected and stored in the portal databaseThe external host/server name

Make of the server, if field is populated

Host IP address

Model of the server, if field is populated

Type of server, such as TSM Media Server

The host’s operating system, if this field is populated

Volumes

Hostname

Location

Last Poll Date

Display Name

Make

IP Address

Model

Type

Operating System

Mount Point Mount point of the file system

Raw File System File system name


File System Type

When you know the file system type, you can determine the host’s storage requirements and limitations.

Examples of file system values:• NTFS - Windows NT File System• ext2, ext3 - Extended File Systems 2 and 3• ufs - Unix File System• vxfs - Veritas File System• FAT - File Allocation Table• hfs - Hierarchical File System (Apple)• ctfs - Cooperative Temporary File System• devfs - Device File System• hsfs - High Sierra File System• jfs - Journaled File System• jfs2 - Journaled File System 2• nfs - Network File System• objfs - File System Object• sfs - Secure File System• gpfs - General Parallel File System (IBM)• proc - a virtual file system• procfs - Process File System• tmpfs - a virtual memory file system• smbfs - Server Message Block File System• Null - empty• NA - not applicable

Storage Type

NAS - Network-attached storage; file servers and software dedicated to providing files over a network. SAN - Storage area network; Fibre Channel connected file servers. DAS - direct-attached storage; part of the host computer.

Volume Group The volume group and logical volume names.

Capacity The host’s file system storage capacity.

Used The amount of the host’s storage that is currently in use.

% Available The percentage of the capacity that is unused.

90 Days Min Used90 Days Avg Used90 Days Max Used

Use these three columns in combination to substantiate the need for additional storage. Using 90 days worth of data, this provides a realistic snapshot of how the forecast was derived.


NAS SharesThis Network Attached Storage Shares table provides details similar to the mount point table, without the Volume Group column.

Allocated and Unused LUNs

LUN name

The RAID type of the LUN

The storage array of the LUN links to the Array Capacity and UtilizationThe Array Group for the LUN

Array product identifier

Capacity of the LUN

Links to the Host Utilization Detail

This table shows any LUNs that have not been partitioned or allocated to a volume group. Therefore, they are not associated with a mount point or file system. This list will be displayed for LUNs that match this “allocated but unused” criteria.

DisksThis table lists the disks associated with the host’s utilization. Expand the Disk Details (click on the +) to view the raw disk paths, storage types, and LUNs associated with disks.

Multi-pathed disks also are represented in this list. Multi-pathing is supported for the following products: EMC PowerPath, Hitachi Dynamic Link Manager (HDLM), and Symantec Dynamic Multi Pathing (DMP).

Disk name

The vendor information

DAS, SAN, NAS

The Array Group for the disk links to the Array Capacity and UtilizationThe LUN links to the LUN Utilization Summary

Disk size

Disk path

Name

RAID Type

Storage Array

Array Group

Product

Capacity

Host

Disk Name

Disk Make

Storage Type

Storage Array

LUN

Size

Raw Disk Path


Disk Partitions/Volume Group Details

The name of the volume group

LUN or DSK

LUN or Disk name

Storage array; if this field is empty, it means it is a local disk

Name of the disk

Disk capacity

Expand the Volume Group Details (click on the +) to identify unallocated space in a Volume Group and logical volumes that are not being used by hosts. These details highlight inefficient use of storage.This table will be present only when there are one or more volume groups set up on the selected host. The table displays each volume group along with the physical disks that have been allocated to the volume group and the logical volume details. Use this table to find any un-allocated storage—that is, space that is available within the volume group that has not been assigned to a logical volume.If the Array name is missing from a table entry it is because it is a local disk.Note: Totals in a Volume Group reflect usable capacity—so, for example, RAID 1 mirrored disks will show only the capacity that is usable.

Group MembershipDisplays the server groups for which the host is a member. Click on a server group link to view additional membership details.

Note: The Capacity and Used columns are aggregated and then converted to the units selected in the Advanced option of the report from which the Host Utilization Detail was launched. Note that in the conversion to the displayed units, the totals may appear to be slightly inaccurate. This is due to the division or multiplication by 1024.

Volume Group

Type

Name

Array

Physical Disk Name

Size


LUN Utilization Summary To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > LUN Utilization SummaryIf LUNs are not being used efficiently, you want to know so that you can change their allocation or reassign them altogether. Using the LUN Utilization Summary, you can view all the mapping details, such as mount points and file systems.• For NetApp-specific LUN Utilization details, see NetApp LUN Utilization Summary.• For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

This report can be filtered (in the Report Designer window) to report on the following subsets of data:• Unallocated - These are simply LUNs that have not been allocated to any host. The array has

created the LUN, but there is no storage path.• Allocated, but undiscovered - Often referred to as orphaned LUNs, these are LUNs that

have been assigned to a host, but they have not been discovered and therefore are not seen on the host side. The array has created the LUN and the storage path exists, but there is no access to host port and host information, such as disks, partitions, and volume groups. To make these LUNs visible to the host, a system administrator must execute a LUN scan or, for older OS and volume manager versions, re-boot the system. Otherwise, this storage is not available for mounting file systems. The LUN scan tells the HBA (host bus adapter) that a LUN has been zoned to the host.

• Allocated, but unused - These are LUNs that have been assigned to a host, but the host has not been placed into a volume group, or a partition has not been created. The array has

LUN Utilization Summary 251

created the LUN and the storage path exists, making the host and host port information available to Capacity Manager. However, the host storage details—disks, partitions, and volume groups—are not available for the host associated with the storage path.

Note: The list of Allocated, but unused LUNs will always include the Allocated, but undiscovered LUNs, along with the additional LUNs that may not have been discovered.

Click on the arrow to drill down to a hierarchical detailed view, including mount point details. This arrow is not displayed if the LUN does not have multiple mount points or has no mount points.

Name The name of the LUN.Raid Type The RAID level on the LUN. When the RAID type indicates

Disk, there is no RAID protection.Aggregate (NetApp only)Volume (NetApp only)QTree QTree associated with the LUN (NetApp only)Array Group The group to which the array belongs.

Links to the Array Group Details.Storage Array The array on which the LUN was created.

Click on the array name link to go to the Array Capacity & Utilization report.

Capacity The total capacity (used and unused) of the LUN.Estimated Used LUN estimated used.

See Estimated LUN Usage/Availability.Estimated Available Estimated available LUN storage.Mount Point Used The amount of storage used by each mount point. These

values are displayed when a LUN is expanded to view mount point details.

Host The name of the host to which the LUN was allocated. Click on a host link to launch the Host Utilization Detail.

Host LUN The LUN to which the host is mapped.Mount Point The host’s file system mount point for this LUN. It is possible

to have zero mount points and file systems, in the scenario where a LUN has been allocated to the host, but the host has not yet made use of it by creating a file system and mounting it.

File System The host’s file system or drive name to which the LUN maps. LUNs simply appear as disks to hosts.

Volume Group The logical collection or volume group to which the volume belongs

iGroup Initiator Group name. For NetApp storage, a LUN is mapped to an iGroup—a method of LUN masking.


Host Storage Domain The name of the host storage domain, a logical group of LUNs that can be accessed by multiple hosts through the same physical storage port, with each host accessing its unique LUN. For security purposes, LUN masking is also coupled with this capability. A host storage domain is Hitachi’s name for multi-hosted storage capability.

Array Port WWN The unique identifier, World Wide Name, of the array port address.

iSCSI Interface The iGroup contains an iSCSI qualified name that maps to a LUN. (NetApp only)

LUN Utilization Summary 253

Estimated LUN Usage/AvailabilitySeveral Capacity Manager reports display certain LUN values as estimated—Estimated Usage, Estimated Available. These values are estimated because of the following logic for deriving the values:• A volume group has members that are made up of many disks.• These disks may be local disks or LUNs from one or more arrays.• Partitions are created from a volume group and then the partition is mounted onto a host, so

that the host can use the mounted partition.• Because of the above sequence, Capacity Manager cannot determine which partition

came from which LUN. Therefore, using the available information, the values are estimated.


Array Group DetailsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > LUN Utilization SummaryThen, drill down to the details:Click an Array Group link.

This report lists all the LUNs and the physical devices associated with the selected array group.

Links to the Array Capacity & UtilizationThe array’s chassis numberThe array group nameThe array group numberThe object ID, for object-based storageRAID type for the array groupTotal capacity for this array groupAmount of space that has already been allocatedAmount of space available

Links to the LUN Utilization Summary

LUN’s capacity

LUN’s RAID type

LUN’s device number

ArrayChassis NumberGroup NameGroup NumberObject IDRAID TypeTotalAllocatedFree

LUN

Total Capacity

RAID Type

Device Number

Array Group Details 255

Physical disk name

Disk’s capacity

Disk manufacturer

Disk’s serial number

Disk model

Current firmware version of the device

EMC CLARiiON Storage Array Group SpecificsFor EMC CLARiiON storage arrays, the operating system uses a small amount of storage for internal processing. So, in the Array Group Details report, you will notice a difference in the Total (at the top left of the report) and the sum of the Capacity in the List of Physical Devices table (at the bottom right of the report).

Device Name

Capacity

Vendor

Serial #

Model

Firmware Version


Host HBA SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Host HBA Summary

Host nameThe HBA device name collected from the hostThe node’s worldwide nameThe node’s nickname, if there is one assignedHBA driverHBA driver versionFirmware version

Model of the host bus adapterHBA manufacturerVendor of the host bus adapterLast time data collection updated these values in the portal database

NameDevice NameNode WWNNode NicknameDriverDriver VersionFirmware VersionHBA ModelManufacturerVendorLast Updated

Host HBA Summary 257

Array Port UtilizationTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Port UtilizationThis report provides a list of the physical/logical port connections between the host’s adapter and the storage array. Use this report to troubleshoot connectivity issues and to re-configure when hosts or arrays are taken out of service. In addition, this report provides information you can use to manage load-balancing across array ports.For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

Storage ArrayThe array links to the Array Capacity and Utilization.You can select multiple storage arrays or a single array when you generate this report.

Array Port The array’s port number

Host Name of the host that owns the HBA (host bus adaptor) port.Links to the Host Utilization Detail.

Host Ports List of the host ports.

Mount Point The mount point of the file system that’s utilizing the port.

File System Name of the file system.


File System Type

When you know the file system type, you can determine the host’s storage requirements and limitations.

Examples of file system values:NTFS - Windows NT File Systemext2, ext3 - Extended File Systems 2 and 3ufs - Unix File Systemvxfs - Veritas File SystemFAT - File Allocation Tablehfs - Hierarchical File System (Apple)ctfs - Cooperative Temporary File Systemdevfs - Device File Systemhsfs - High Sierra File Systemjfs - Journaled File Systemjfs2 - Journaled File System 2nfs - Network File Systemobjfs - File System Objectsfs - Secure File Systemgpfs - General Parallel File System (IBM)proc - a virtual file systemprocfs - Process File Systemtmpfs - a virtual memory file systemsmbfs - Server Message Block File SystemNull - emptyNA - not applicable

Capacity Capacity of the file system.

Used The amount of the storage array being used by the file system.

Array Port Utilization 259

Array Capacity Forecast To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Forecast > Array Capacity ForecastUse the Capacity Forecast report to project growth in storage usage. You can generate the report by the following criteria:• Historical date range• Forecast horizon (date range)• Storage Array Group• Forecast by Array Capacity or LUN Capacity

In addition, you can choose to generate graphs for each, individual array or instead, display a consolidated graph for all the arrays selected in the Report Designer.

Mouse-over the markers on the lines to view:• Historical Usage: Allocated and Total Capacity• Forecasted Usage: Allocated and Total Capacity

The Array name links to the Array Capacity and Utilization.


Array The name of the storage array. Links to the Array Capacity and Utilization.

Allocated CapacityThis line tracks the historical and forecasted allocation.

Total CapacityThis line tracks the historical and forecasted capacity.


Host Capacity Forecast To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Forecast > Host Capacity ForecastThis forecast report provides an at-a-glance overview of historical and predicted usage. Note: To ensure that your report reflects both historical and forecasted usage, when you generate the report, verify that your date range starts on a past date and ends on a future date. The current day is treated as the future for the purpose of forecasting. Typically, if you specify three months before and after the current day, you’ll have sufficient data for a valid forecast. The default display is Grouped by Months. However, to see results based on previous weeks, choose Group by Weeks in the Report Designer. The Group by Weeks option is especially useful during the first few weeks of Capacity Manager deployment.

You also can narrow the scope of this report by specifying a storage type filter of: SAN, DAS, or NAS.When you generate this report, you can select the type of output—either by host or by file system. If you select file system, the specific path, host name, and mount point will be associated with each graph.

1. Mouse-over the thermometer to view usage.

2. Mouse-over the markers on the lines to view:• Historical Usage: Average and Maximum Size• Forecasted Usage: Average and Maximum Size

3. Click the Host link to launch the Host Utilization Detail.

4. Click the Total Volumes link to view the Host Capacity Forecast by File System.

Date The first day of the period for which the usage is projected.

Avg Size The historical average usage.

Max Size The historical maximum usage.

Host Capacity Forecast 261


Avg Size Future The projected usage based on the average usage history (or historical average usage for periods in history).

Max Size Future The projected usage based on the maximum usage history (or historical average usage for periods in history).


Applications At RiskTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Application Capacity & Utilization > Applications At RiskUsing this report, you can identify applications that are at risk of running out of storage space. Identify which applications are expected to run out of storage and when.

Note: The Applications at Risk report supports the following applications: SQL Server and Oracle Database.


Name The application at risk.

Risk Date The first date of the period for which the usage is projected.The risk date is based on the historical growth of the application’s usage.

Usage The projected usage based on the average usage history (or historical average usage for periods in history).

Projected High-Water Mark

The projected usage based on the maximum usage history (or historical average usage for periods in history).

Capacity The database capacity.

Current Usage Database storage already in use.

Threshold

Thresholds can be set by an administrator using Admin > Threshold Policies. When determining when an application is “at risk,” several factors are taken into consideration. First, if a threshold has been set for a particular application—that is, a database threshold—then that threshold is used to determine the risk. If there is no threshold associated with the application’s database, then other thresholds are checked, in the following sequence: Host for the associated LUN/Filesystem/Database > Server group to which the host belongs > Top-level, global server group. If no threshold settings are found at the above levels, the system defaults are used: 90% for Critical, 70% for Warning, and 30% for Low.

Applications At Risk 263

Over-Provisioned ApplicationsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Application Capacity & Utilization > Over Provisioned ApplicationsUsing this report, you can identify applications that are at risk of having over-provisioned storage. Often, storage is allocated to a project, but never used. This report helps you to identify excess, unused storage so that it can be reclaimed for another purpose.


Name The application that has been given storage that remains unused.

As of The first date of the period for which the usage is projected.

Usage The projected usage based on the average usage history (or historical average usage for periods in history).

High-Water Mark The projected usage based on the maximum usage history (or historical average usage for periods in history).

Capacity The database capacity

Current Usage Database storage already in use

Available Amount of storage still available

Threshold An application is determined to be over-provisioned when the usage is under the threshold.


Application Storage Dashboard To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Application Capacity & Utilization > Application Storage Dashboard

This report essentially interrogates the application to identify what storage is free. In addition, this report provides data that can be used to resolve performance issues. The table has three main sections of information: Application Storage, File System Storage, and Array Storage.

Click on the arrow to drill down to a hierarchical Application Sub-Level of the Application Storage Dashboard view. Each subsequent drilldown takes you to the next level of the application, such as the table space and file system level.

Application

The name of the level. For the application level, the name will be specific to the application, such as Exchange or Oracle. If it is the tablespace level, the name of the respective tablespace is displayed.

Host The host(s) associated with the application

Application Storage Total

Total storage allocated to the application.App. Used + App. Free = App. TotalThe total may not be precise to the decimal, as 1 Kbyte = 1024.

Application Storage Free

Amount of storage available for the application. In some cases, storage does not need to be pre-allocated to the application, so this field will display as N/A.

Application Storage Used

Amount of storage consumed by the application. This is the amount of consumed storage as reported by the application. For example, in Oracle within a data file it would display how much space is really being consumed by Oracle.

File System Storage Total

This total indicates the amount of storage used by the file system associated with the application.

File System Storage Free

Amount of unused and available file system storage. Refer to this value to determine if there is space to expand a files system.

Application Storage Dashboard 265


File System Storage Used

Amount of used file system storage.

Array Storage Total This total indicates the amount of storage used by the array on which this application is located.

Array Storage Free Amount of available array storage.

Array Storage Used Amount of used array storage.

LUNs A concatenated list of LUNs from which the space is being taken by this application.


Application Sub-Level of the Application Storage DashboardTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Application Capacity & Utilization > Application Storage DashboardThen, click the arrow to drill down to the Application Level detail.

The data displayed in this window is simply the next level within the application—that is, instance-level reporting, as described in Application Storage Dashboard. At the application sub-level, a host link launches the Host Utilization Detail.For example, an Oracle Database Administrator may be interested in managing storage at the tablespace level. Using the Application Storage Dashboard, the administrator can expand the Oracle application to view table space and also file system usage. In essence, this view provides the physical implementation of the file system, including the LUNs allocated to it.

Application Sub-Level of the Application Storage Dashboard 267

Available/Reclaimable StorageThe reports in this menu group provide the data for realizing your ROI—Return on Investment. By identifying underutilized storage, an enterprise can optimize existing storage resources and possibly defer purchases.

Array Utilization DashboardTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Available or Reclaimable Storage> Array Utilization DashboardThis report provides array utilization statistics for Hitachi, EMC Symmetrix, and NetApp storage arrays.

In the LUN Capacity by Category chart, the bars represent the following:• Primary - The LUN capacity for the primary array.• Copy - The LUN capacity for a copy stored on the primary array.• Replication - The LUN capacity for a replication of the data on an external storage array.

Click on the bars in this chart to launch the Array Utilization Summary.In the Array Utilization bar chart, the bars link to the Array Utilization Summary, displaying the capacity usage that corresponds to the chart’s legend colors.In the Array Utilization Summary table, the # Groups links to the List Array Groups report, from which you can access Array Group Details.


For details about the Chargeback Policy Capacity table, see Chargeback Policy Capacity.

Array Utilization SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Available or Reclaimable Storage> Array Utilization SummaryThis report can be used to identify the percentage of raw storage that has been allocated to RAID groups and, more importantly, the percentage of raw capacity that is available.

Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:• Storage Array or VFiler - NetApp Storage System Detail• # Groups - List Array Groups• # LUNs - LUN Utilization Summary


Available/Reclaimable Storage 269

The name of the array.

The amount of raw capacity on the array.

The amount of raw capacity that has been allocated.

The amount of raw capacity that is available to be allocated.

The percentage of the total raw capacity that is available.

The number of RAID groups for this array drills down to the List Array Groups report.The amount of capacity in the RAID groups.

Applicable to HDS arrays only - Capacity from a back-end system, derived from daisy-chained external storage (back-end systems). This is array group capacity that does not have PDEVs in the storage array.All the capacity from the attached disks

Total used capacity of the array groups (by LUNs) in the storage array.Available capacity of the array groups in the storage array.

The number of LUNs that have been created on the array. Click on the Used link or the LUN link to go to the LUN Utilization Summary Report.The total capacity for the LUNs.

The total storage capacity for the allocated LUNs.

The number of LUNs that have yet to be allocated.

Amount of unallocated LUN capacity.

Storage Array

Raw: Capacity

Raw: Allocated Size

Raw: Available Size

Raw: % Available

RAID: # Groups

RAID: Capacity

RAID: Virtual Capacity

RAID: Local Capacity

RAID: Used

RAID: Available

LUNS: # LUNs

LUNS: Total Capacity

LUNS: Alloc Capacity

LUNS: # Unallocated

LUNS: UnAlloc Capacity


Allocated but Unused LUNsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Available or Reclaimable Storage> Allocated but Unused LUNsThese are LUNs that have been assigned to a host, but the host has not been placed into a volume group, or a partition has not been created. The array has created the LUN and the storage path exists, making the host and host port information available to Capacity Manager. However, the host storage details—disks, partitions, and volume groups—are not available for the host associated with the storage path.

Note: The list of Allocated, but unused LUNs will always include the Allocated but Undiscovered LUNs, along with the additional LUNs that may not have been discovered.

Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:• Array Group - Array Group Details• Array Name - Array Capacity and Utilization• Host - Host Utilization Detail


Name Name of the LUN that has been allocated, but unused

RAID Type The RAID level on the LUN. When the RAID type is Disk, there is no RAID protection.


Array Group The group to which the array belongs.

Storage Array The storage array for this LUN

Capacity The total capacity (used and unused) of the LUN

Estimated Used LUN estimated used

Estimated Available Estimated available LUN storage

Mount Point Used The amount of storage used by each mount point

Host The name of the host to which the LUN was allocated

Host LUN The host LUN

Mount Point

The host’s file system mount point for this LUN. It is possible to have zero mount points and file systems, in the scenario where a LUN has been allocated to the host, but the host has not yet made use of it by creating a file system and mounting it.


Volume Group The logical collection or volume group to which the volume belongs

Host Storage Domain

The name of the host storage domain, a logical group of LUNs that can be accessed by multiple hosts through the same physical storage port, with each host accessing its unique LUN. For security purposes, LUN masking is also coupled with this capability. A host storage domain is Hitachi’s name for multi-hosted storage capability.

Array Port WWN Array port world wide name


Allocated but Undiscovered LUNsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Available or Reclaimable Storage> Allocated but Undiscovered LUNsOften referred to as orphaned LUNs, these are LUNs that have been assigned to a host, but they have not been discovered and therefore are not seen on the host side. The array has created the LUN and the storage path exists, but there is no access to host port and host information, such as disks, partitions, and volume groups. To make these LUNs visible to the host, a system administrator must execute a LUN scan or, for older OS and volume manager versions, re-boot the system. Otherwise, this storage is not available for mounting file systems. The LUN scan tells the HBA (host bus adapter) that a LUN has been zoned to the host.

Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:• Array Group - Array Group Details• Array Name - Array Capacity and Utilization

For descriptions of the displayed fields, see LUN Utilization Summary.For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.


Unallocated LUNsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Available or Reclaimable Storage> Unallocated LUNsThese are simply LUNs that have not been allocated to any hosts. The array has created the LUNs, but there are no storage paths.

Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:• Array Group - Array Group Details• Array Name - Array Capacity and Utilization

For descriptions of the displayed fields, see LUN Utilization Summary.For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.


Suspected De-provisioned HostsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Available or Reclaimable Storage> Suspected De-provisioned HostsSometimes LUNs have been assigned to a host, but later, that host is re-assigned or de-provisioned. Often when hosts are retired, their storage is not given back to the pool and that storage remains unused.Capacity Manager identifies suspected de-provisioned hosts by determining data staleness—that is, finding hosts for which data has not been collected within the specified time period. The default period is 14 days, however, you can choose from 3 days to a year for the report’s time period. Hosts in this list deserve further investigation to determine if they truly have been de-provisioned.

Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:• Array Group - Array Group Details• Array Name - Array Capacity and Utilization• Host - Host Utilization Detail



Unused Partitions/Logical VolumesTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Available or Reclaimable Storage> Unused Partitions/Logical VolumesThis report lists all hosts with logical volumes that have no mounted file systems. A logical volume may have been created in the volume group, but the logical volume is not being used by the host. These unused volumes provide available storage.

Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:• Host - Host Utilization Detail



Unused Disks/Volume GroupsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Available or Reclaimable Storage> Unused Disks/Volume GroupsUse this report to view a list of hosts that have available space. These hosts have space from which more partitions or logical volumes can be created. This report can be used to identify storage that has been requested, but that is not being used. Then, the list can be emailed to the group that has requested the storage.Note: In this report, if the RAID type = 1, the capacity is divided by 2, to reflect true usable capacity.

Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:• Host Name - Host Utilization Detail


Host Name Host that has been identified as having available space

Disk Vol Grp The volume group that has been identified

Type Type of Disk/Volume Group

Capacity Capacity of the host

Used Used capacity

Available Capacity available for this host

RAID Type The RAID type of the volume group


Capacity Chargeback and BillingCapacity Chargeback Policies are configured by the StorageConsole Administrator. The administrator uses these policies to assign a cost-per-GB to hosts in a server group.

Capacity Chargeback By Host To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Chargeback and Billing > Chargeback By Host

Host name links to the Host Utilization Detail

Links the capacity chargeback policy details

The cost per unit, as defined by the capacity chargeback policy. Total capacity that will be charged for this host; links to Chargeback DetailUsage * Unit Cost = Total Cost

Refer to the Application Administrator’s Guide for details on configuring a Capacity Chargeback Policy.

Host

Policy

Unit Cost

Total Usage

Total Cost



Chargeback DetailTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Chargeback and Billing > Chargeback By HostThen, click on Total Usage.

Host name links to the Host Utilization Detail

Links the capacity chargeback policy details

Links to the Array Capacity & Utilization.


The cost per unit, as defined by the capacity chargeback policy. Amount of storage used for this host.

Usage * Unit Cost = Total Cost

Host

Policy

Array

LUN

Unit Cost

Total Usage

Total Cost

Capacity Chargeback and Billing 279

Chargeback Policy CapacityTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Chargeback and Billing > Chargeback Policy CapacityThis report lists the capacity details, per Capacity Chargeback Policy.Refer to Application Administrator’s Guide for details on configuring a Capacity Chargeback Policy.

Policy The name of the capacity chargeback policy links to the policy details.

Unit Cost The cost per unit that will be charged

RAID: Total Capacity Total capacity of the array groups in the storage array.

RAID: Virtual Capacity


RAID: Local Capacity All the capacity from the attached disks

RAID: Used Total used capacity of the array groups (by LUNs) in the storage array

RAID: Available Available capacity of the array groups in the storage array.

LUNs: Total Total LUN capacity for the policy



Policy Detail

Displays the Policy Type, such as Array Family, Array Type, Array Name, Drive Speed, Drive Type, Drive Capacity, RAID Type, Is Local, Is HDP, Is DAS, or Domain.The value associated with the Policy/Item type.

The Policy Detail report is available from the Chargeback Policy Capacity report. It simply provides a list of the policy details.

LUNs: Allocated Allocated LUN capacity for the policy

LUNs: UnAllocated Unallocated LUN capacity for the policy

HDP: Capacity Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning capacity

HDP: Used Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning capacity in use

HDP: Available Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning capacity that is available

Item Type

Item Value

Capacity Chargeback and Billing 281

LUNs At Risk Pro-actively increase LUN capacity and avoid outages or performance issues associated with insufficient capacity.To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > LUNs At RiskWhen you generate this report, select a capacity threshold: Low, Warning, or Critical. Typically, for at risk reports, you will want to view the Critical LUNs—that is, those that are at risk of breaching the critical threshold and running out of space.Note: When reviewing the values in this report, note that LUNs at risk are determined by evaluating current and projected usage.

NameThe specific logical unit number that is at risk of running out of room. Click on this link to access details in the LUN Utilization Summary.

Risk Date (Projected) The date that the LUN is projected to exceed its threshold and will no longer be considered over-provisioned.

Usage (Projected) Usage based on the period that you’ve selected.

High-Water Mark (Projected)

The projected high-water mark represents the maximum usage, based on the history for the report’s selected period. Note that this size may represent temporary usage.

Array The group to which this LUN belongs.

Mount Point The host’s file system mount point for this LUN.

Raw File System The explicit full directory path for the file system.



Host Storage Domain

The name of the host storage domain, a logical group of LUNs that can be accessed by multiple hosts through the same physical storage port, with each host accessing its unique LUN. For security purposes, LUN masking is also coupled with this capability. Host storage domain is Hitachi’s name for its multi-hosted storage capability.

iGroup The iGroup associated with the LUN

Volume Group The logical collection or volume group to which the volume belongs.

Current Usage The amount of storage already committed.

Host Name Click on a host name to launch the Host Utilization Detail.

Capacity The total capacity (used and unused) of the LUN.

Threshold

A LUN is determined to be at risk when this tolerance threshold is crossed. The default thresholds are set at: Low = 30%; Warning = 70%; Critical = 90%. To modify thresholds for a particular LUN, go to the Portal’s Admin toolbar: Admin > Threshold PoliciesFor additional details, see “Adding/Editing a Threshold Policy” in the Application Administrator’s Guide.

LUNs At Risk 283

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Logical_Unit_Number_Masking

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Volume_group

Over-Provisioned LUNs To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > Over Provisioned LUNsIf you’ve over-provisioned LUNs, you really want to know. Over-provisioning leads to increased costs unless you reclaim the space.When you execute this report, you can select the Threshold for the list that will be displayed. Typically, you’ll be interested in the Low or Warning thresholds. Since this report shows over-provisioning, the list will show usage that has not reached the threshold.

Name The LUN number/ID.As of This date indicates when the LUN became over-provisioned.High-Water Mark (Projected)

The projected high-water mark represents the maximum usage, based on the history for the report’s selected period. Note that this size may represent temporary usage.

Host Name Click on a host name to launch the Host Utilization Detail.Capacity The total capacity (used and unused) of the LUN.Current Usage

Amount of storage currently used.

Available Capacity - Current UsageArray The array to which the LUN belongs.Mount Point Location of the file system.Raw File System

Explicit disk location of the LUN.


http://searchstorage.techtarget.com/originalContent/0,289142,sid5_gci1047795,00.html


Host Storage Domain

The name of the host storage domain, a logical group of LUNs that can be accessed by multiple hosts through the same physical storage port, with each host accessing its unique LUN. For security purposes, LUN masking is also coupled with this capability. A host storage domain is Hitachi’s name for multi-hosted storage capability.

iGroup The iGroup associated with the LUN

Volume Group

The logical collection or volume group to which the volume belongs.

Threshold A LUN is determined to be at risk when this tolerance threshold is crossed. The default thresholds are set at: Low = 30%; Warning = 70%; Critical = 90%. To modify thresholds for a particular LUN, go to the Portal’s Admin toolbar: Admin > Threshold Policies

For additional details, see “Adding/Editing a Threshold Policy” in the Application Administrator’s Guide.

Over-Provisioned LUNs 285

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Logical_Unit_Number_Masking


Hosts at Risk To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > Hosts At RiskWhen you generate this report, select a capacity threshold: Low, Warning, or Critical. Typically, for at risk reports, you will want to view the Critical hosts—that is, those that are at risk of breaching the critical threshold.This report lists only the hosts that require your immediate attention. Use the host link to drill down to particulars.

Note: When reviewing the values in this report, note that hosts at risk are determined by evaluating current and projected usage.

Host Name Click on a host name to access details in the Host Utilization Detail.

Risk Date (Projected) The date that the host is projected to exceed its threshold and will no longer be considered over-provisioned.

Usage (Projected) Projected usage associated with the risk date.


The high-water mark represents the maximum usage for a period. Note that this size may represent temporary usage

Capacity The host’s storage limit.



Current Usage Storage already consumed.

Threshold

A host becomes at risk when this tolerance threshold is crossed. The default thresholds are set at: Low = 30%; Warning = 70%; Critical = 90%. To modify thresholds for a particular host, go to the Portal’s Admin toolbar: Admin > Threshold Policies


Hosts at Risk 287

Over-Provisioned HostsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > Over Provisioned HostsBy determining which hosts are over-provisioned, you can take steps to reclaim the space before committing resources to acquire additional storage. Over-provisioning leads to increased costs as a result of under-utilized storage.When you execute this report, you can select the Threshold for the list that will be displayed. Typically, you’ll be interested in the Low or Warning thresholds. Since this report shows over-provisioning, the list will show usage that has not reached the threshold.


Name Click on a host name to access details in the Host Utilization Detail.

As of (Projected) This date indicates when the host became over-provisioned.

Usage (Projected) Projected consumption by the host.


High-Water Mark = Capacity * Threshold

Capacity The host’s storage limit.

Current Usage Storage already consumed.

Threshold

A host becomes over-provisioned when the usage is under the threshold. The default thresholds are set at: Low = 30%; Warning = 70%; Critical = 90%. To modify thresholds for a particular host, go to the Portal’s Admin toolbar: Admin > Threshold Policies



http://searchstorage.techtarget.com/originalContent/0,289142,sid5_gci1047795,00.html

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 16Chapter 15NetApp Capacity Reports

Capacity Manager provides insight into storage users, over-consumption, and under-utilized storage. The data collected from NetApp storage is displayed in the reports described in this chapter.This chapter covers the following topics:• Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View)• NetApp Storage System Detail• NetApp LUN Utilization Summary• NetApp Aggregate Summary• NetApp Aggregate Detail• NetApp Plex Details• NetApp Volume Summary• NetApp Volume Details• NetApp NFS Summary• NetApp CIFS Summary• QTree Summary• NetApp Snapshot Summary• Array iSCSI Port Utilization• NetApp Disk Summary• NetApp Aggregates at Risk• NetApp Volumes at Risk• Thin Provisioning Overview

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Capacity Manager Reports.

289

Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View)To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationBecause NetApp utilizes a number of unique constructs—such as Aggregates and Volumes—to organize and access its storage, additional data is available via drilldown links.

The report is organized into four columns:1. NetApp Summary

2. Raw Capacity

3. Aggregate/Volume Capacity - Pools of available storage can be found in existing RAID groups. Even though storage may be 100% allocated at the array level, the RAID group utilization will reveal the amount of remaining, usable storage.

4. LUN Capacity


NetApp Summary

The VFiler name

The name that you assigned to the array. Available values include all supported storage devices. For a list of supported devices, see the APTARE StorageConsole Certified Configurations Guide. The specific model of the NetApp storage.

The current status of the storage. Mouse over this status to view details.

The name of the product, typically shown as a series number. This field provides an indicator of capacity specifications, such as LUNs, hosts per array, and drives per array.Number of Fibre Channel ports

Links to Array iSCSI Port Utilization.

Links to NetApp CIFS Summary.

Links to NetApp NFS Summary.

Links to NetApp Disk Summary.

The number of hosts that are sharing the capacity. This is the total number of unique hosts that have LUNs assigned by this storage array, and the hosts have been successfully queried using one or more host resource policies. If zero, host resources data has not been collected. Links to the LUN Utilization Summary.

Percentage of the NetApp storage already utilized.

This section of the report provides a overview of the storage system, with links to rele-vant components.


VFiler

Storage Array

Model

Status

Product

# FC Ports

# iSCSI Ports

# CIFS Share

# NFS Export

# Disks

# Hosts

Host Usage

% Used

Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View) 291

Raw CapacityThis column of information summarizes capacity and usage. The percentages, in particular, capture the essence of your current utilization status.

Aggregate/Volume CapacityThis column provides an overview of the aggregate (not for VFilers) and volume (for VFilers) capacity and utilization.

Capacity

Total raw capacity of the storage array. This value is the sum of all PDEVs (including spares—that is, drives that are not allocated to an Aggregate). If the RAID state of the PDEV is partner or broken, the disk is not included in the raw capacity calculation. You can set the capacity units to be displayed, either GB or MB, by selecting the Advanced option when you generate the report.

Allocated SizeTotal raw capacity of the logical unit numbers (LUNs) in the array that have been mapped to a host. These LUNs are typically configured as volumes on the host and dedicated to an application.

Available SizeTotal raw capacity of the array that has not been carved into a RAID group. The size is displayed in the units you selected with the Advanced option when you generated the report.

% Available


Raw Usage Expressed as a percentage, total capacity that has been assigned to a host and that is not available for provisioning.

# Aggregates Links to the NetApp Aggregate Summary.

Aggr Capacity The aggregate’s total size

Aggr Used Amount of the aggregate’s capacity that is in use

Aggr Available Available storage in the aggregate

Aggr Usage Used data storage at the physical layerMouse over the thermometer bar to view the % available.

# Total Volumes The number of volumes defined for this NetApp unitLinks to the NetApp Volume Summary.

# Thin Prov Vols The number of thin provisioned volumes; Includes volumes where the Space Guarantee value equals “file” or “none.”

Volume Capacity Total capacity for all associated volumes

Volume Used Total of used space for all the associated volumes

Volume Available Available capacity from all of the associated volumes

Volume Usage Used data storage at the logical layerMouse over the thermometer bar to view the % available.


LUN CapacityThe LUN fields enable drill-down access to additional details so that you can determine the capacity of each configured LUN.

Note: The Capacity and Used columns are aggregated and then converted to the units selected in the Advanced option of the report from which the Host Utilization Detail was launched. Note that in the conversion to the displayed units, the totals may appear to be slightly inaccurate. This is due to the division or multiplication by 1024.

# LUNs The number of LUNs that have been created on the array. Click on the Used link or the LUN link to go to the LUN Utilization Summary.

Total LUN Capacity Total storage capacity for all of the associated LUNs

# Allocated LUNs

The number of LUNs on the array that have been mapped to a host. These LUNs are typically configured as volumes on the host and dedicated to an application. For NetApp, these are the LUNs associated with an iGroup. Click on the Allocated LUNs link or the LUN link to go to the LUN Utilization Summary.

AllocLUN Capacity The total storage capacity for the allocated LUNs

# UnAllocated LUNs The number of LUNs that have yet to be allocated

UnAllocated LUN Capacity

The available LUN capacity

LUN Usage % of LUN capacity that is currently in use

Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View) 293

NetApp Storage System DetailTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationThen, click the Array Name link.

Current Configuration

Name Name of the NetApp storageIP Address IP address of the storage unitONTAP Version Version of the NetApp ONTAP operating systemDomain Name The DNS domain name


Aggregate Utilization

The thermometers and capacity information provide a sub-set of the information that is available in the NetApp Aggregate Summary.

Volume Utilization

The thermometers and capacity information provide a sub-set of the information that is available in the NetApp Volume Summary.

Capacity Usage Bar Charts

A cascade of bar charts represents usage by:

Auth Type Indicates the type of authentication: ad - Active Directory, nt4 - Windows NT4, workgroup - Workgroup, passwd - Password file, NIS, or LDAP

Security Style NTFS or MultiprotocolServer Name Server nameWindows Type Windows software versionLast Updated Last time the portal database was updated with data collected from the

NetApp system

Aggregate Utilization

Drill down on the “Top 3 of n Aggregate Utilization” to see additional aggregates.• Name• Usage• Total Capacity• Allocated Size• Available Size

Volume Utilization

Drill down on the “Top 3 of n Volume Utilization” to see additional volumes.• Name• Usage• Total Capacity• Allocated Size• Available Size

Capacity Usage Bar Charts • Array - Displays total capacity, the amount used by system overhead,

and spare capacity.• Aggregate - Of the total capacity, what is used by the aggregate• Volume - Volume usage, including specific snapshot details• LUN/Shares/QTrees

NetApp Storage System Detail 295

Aggregate & Volume Capabilities

The name of the current root volume of the NetApp storage arrayDisks supported by this NetApp array. Possible values include 512 (if all disks are 512 bps), 520 (if all disks are 520 bps), mixed (if disks are a mix of 512 and 520 bps), none (if no disks are 512 or 520 bps). Possible values: zoned (fixed VBN), block (block appended), or mixedPossible values include raid0, raid4, raid_dp.

Maximum number of snapshots available per aggregateList of allowed RAID types

Root VolumeDisk Types

Checksum TypesDefault RAID TypesSnapshot MaxAllowed RAID Types


NetApp LUN Utilization SummaryThis NetApp-specific report can be accessed via a LUN link in NetApp-specific reports, such as the NetApp Volume Summary report. A similar report is available for all storage arrays in your environment. See LUN Utilization Summary.Using the LUN Utilization Summary, you can view all the mapping details, such as mount points and file systems.

Name The name of the LUN.Raid Type The RAID level on the LUN. When the RAID type indicates

Disk, there is no RAID protection.Aggregate Links to the NetApp Aggregate Summary.Volume Links to the NetApp Volume Summary.QTree Name of the QTree to which this LUN belongs. Links to the

QTree Summary.Storage Array Links to the NetApp Storage System Detail.Capacity The total capacity (used and unused) of the LUN.Estimated Used LUN estimated used. See Estimated LUN Usage/Availability.

NetApp LUN Utilization Summary 297

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/RAID#Standard_RAID_levels

Estimated Available Amount of LUN estimated to be availableMount Point Used The amount of storage used by each mount point. These

values are displayed when a LUN is expanded to view mount point details.

Host The name of the host to which the LUN was allocated. Click on a host link to launch the Host Utilization Detail.

Host LUN The LUN associated with the host.Mount Point The host’s file system mount point for this LUN.

It’s possible to have zero mount points and file systems, in the scenario where a LUN has been allocated to the host, but the host has not yet made use of it by creating a file system and mounting it.


Volume Group The logical collection or volume group to which the volume belongs.

iGroup Initiator Group name for NetApp storage; a LUN is mapped to an iGroup; that is, a method of LUN masking.

Array Port WWN The unique identifier, World Wide Name, of the array port address.

iSCSI Interface The iGroup contains an iSCSI qualified name that maps to a LUN. (NetApp only)

Space Reserved Indicates if LUN space reservation is enabled



http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/World_Wide_Name

NetApp Aggregate SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Aggregate SummaryorCapacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationThen, click # Aggregates.View this report for an overview of how your aggregates are configured to manage disks, RAID groups, and plexes. The Aggregate Utilization Summary displays one row for each aggregate, with links to Volume and Plex details. Note: If the aggregate is mirrored, two Plexes will be listed.

Aggregate The Aggregate number/IDStorage Array The NetApp system with which the aggregate is associatedUsage Mouse over the usage thermometer to view the % availableTotal Capacity The aggregate’s total capacityAllocated Size Amount of capacity that has been allocated for useAvailable Size Remaining capacity available for useRAID Type raid0 (mirrored), raid4 (single disk for parity), or raid_dp (double-

parity protection)# Volumes Links to the NetApp Volume Summary# of Thin Prov Vols

Number of thin provisioned volumes

List of Plexes Lists 1 or 2 Plexes—2 if SyncMirror is licensed and enabled. Links to the NetApp Plex Details report.

NetApp Aggregate Summary 299

RAID statusNumber of disksTotal capacity of the disks

In addition, the following Disk Type information is displayed:


Raid StatusCountTotal Capacity


NetApp Aggregate DetailTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationThen, click # Aggregates.Then, click an Aggregate Name link.The Aggregate Detail forecasts usage, based on historical data. Mouse over the Volume and Aggregate symbols to view the historical and projected usage.

Aggregate Capacity UsageAt the bottom of the window, the cascade of usage bars illustrates the logical subsets of the aggregate. • Mouse over the colored bar segments to view the actual values instead of the percentages.

NetApp Aggregate Detail 301

NetApp Plex DetailsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationThen, click # Aggregates.Note: The # of Aggregates is not listed for a VFiler, as it is not relevant.

Then, in the Aggregate Utilization Summary, click a Plex link.This drilldown sequence launches the Plex Details report, which displays a list of details for each of the disks in the Plex’s disk pool. Use this report to understand how the RAID groups and disks are organized and configured.

RAID Reconstruction Status:

Name of the PlexY or NDuring RAID reconstruction, as a result of a disk failure, redundant data is read from other disks to recreate the blocks from the failed disk.If reconstruction is in progress, this value shows the completion percentage.

Plex Disk Pool Details:See NetApp Disk Summary for a description of these fields.

NameIs Reconstructing?

Reconstruction %


NetApp Volume SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Volume SummaryorCapacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationThen, click # Volumes.Each volume depends on its aggregate for its physical storage. Both Traditional and FlexVol volumes contain directories and files; they also can contain QTrees and LUNs.

Volume Name of the volumeLinks to the NetApp Volume Details.

Storage Array The name of the NetApp physical storage for the volumeAggr The name of the associated aggregatePct Usage Percentage of the aggregate that is in useSpace Guarantee

The type of space that has been committed: volume, file, or none.Note that file or none indicates thin provisioning.

Type Flex for flexible volumes, Trad for traditional volumesRAID Type raid0 (mirrored), raid4 (single disk for parity), or raid_dp (double-parity

protection)Usage Mouse over the thermometer to view the volume’s % availableTotal Capacity The volume’s total capacity. If the volume is offline or restricted, 0 is

displayed.

NetApp Volume Summary 303


Allocated Size Amount of volume space in use. If the volume is offline or restricted, 0 is displayed.

Available Size Amount of space available on the volume. If the volume is offline or restricted, 0 is displayed.

# QTrees Links to the QTree Summary.# LUNs Links to the LUN Utilization Summary.# Shares The number of CIFS shares using this volume—links to the NetApp CIFS

Summary.# Exports The number of NFS exports using this volume—links to the NetApp NFS

Summary.# Snapshots The number of snapshots using this volume. Links to the NetApp

Snapshot Summary.


NetApp Volume DetailsTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Volume SummaryThen, click Volume Name.

NetApp Volume Details 305

Volume Summary StatusSee NetApp Volume Summary for a description of these fields.

Quota Status

Indicates if quotas are enabled: on or offMinor quota status for the volume, valid only when the status is either resizing or initializing. The sub-status could be: scanning, etc scanning, setup, queue scan, done, or none.If blank, there were no errors. Otherwise, this field displays the last quota error message.If blank, there were no errors. Otherwise, this field displays the collection of quota errors, including the reason code.

Snapshot Schedule Details

This section displays the volume’s current snapshot schedule.

Number of daily snapshots takenNumber of hourly snapshots takenNumber of snapshots taken each minuteNumber of weekly snapshots takenA list of hours when the hourly snapshots are takenA list of minutes when the by-minutes snapshots are taken

Quota Details

StatusSub-Status

Reason

Quota Errors

DaysHoursMinutesWeeksWhich HoursWhich Minutes

Quota Type User, group, or treeQuota Target Name, number, or path name, relevant to the quota typeTree Name of the QTree for this quotaDisk Used Current amount of disk space; “-” indicates unlimitedHard Disk Limit The amount of disk space reserved for the target; “-” indicates

unlimited.Soft Disk Limit Both an SNMP trap and a log message are generated when the target

exceeds this limit; “-” indicates unlimited.Threshold When the target exceeds this amount of disk space, a message is loggedFile Used Current number of files used by the quota targetHard File Limit Number of files allowed for the target


Soft File Limit Both an SNMP trap and a log message are generated when the target exceeds this limit; “-” indicates unlimited.

Quota User Name Name of the User, Group, or SID (Windows security ID)

NetApp Volume Details 307

NetApp NFS SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp NFS SummaryorCapacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & Utilization

The pathname of the fileName of the volume, which links to the NetApp Volume Details.Name of the associated QTreeLink to the NetApp Storage System Detail.Host NFS permission type: read-only, read-write, rootThe name of the root hostIP address or host name of the host to which the file system is exportedThe mount point of the host that is using the volumeTotal capacity associated with the path and volumeAmount of capacity that is used by NFS clientsAvailable capacity for NFS client use

Then, click a # NFS Exports link.NetApp volumes that are exported via the NFS protocol are listed in this report. Using this report, you can identify who is using the NFS shares.


Path NameVolumeQTreeStorage ArrayHost TypeRoot Host NameHostHost Mount PointTotal CapacityUsed CapacityFree Capacity


NetApp CIFS SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp CIFS SummaryorCapacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & Utilization

Directory name of the shareMount point of the shareThe maximum number of simultaneous connections to the share—0 indicates no limitIndicates if the volume is offline—Yes or NoThis group overrides the group of the file’s owner, so if this field is blank, it defaults to the file owner’s group.Name of the volume links to the NetApp Volume Summary.Name of the associated QTree links to the QTree SummaryLinks to the NetApp Storage System Detail.Description of the shareName of the host that is using the volumeThe home directory of the host that is using the volumeTotal size of the shareAmount of storage used by the shareAvailable capacity

Then, click # CIFS Shares.View the volumes that have been exported to Windows hosts through CIFS (Common Internet File System) shares. This report displays the usage of each share.


NameMount PointMax User

Is Volume OfflineForce Group

VolumeQTreeStorage ArrayDescriptionHost NameHost Mount PointTotal CapacityUsed CapacityFree Capacity

NetApp CIFS Summary 309

QTree SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp QTree SummaryA QTree is the mechanism used to partition a volume, enabling the management of storage by project, user, or group. Use this QTree Summary to view the quota management configurations for the QTrees within a storage system. Then, drill down to view how each volume is partitioned.


Qtree Name of the QTree, or if the ID is 0, the name of the volume is displayedStorage Array Name of the associated NetApp storage systemID ID of the QTree, which is unique within a volume. An ID of 0 indicates

the volume itself.Oplocks Indicates if CIFS (Common Internet File System) opportunistic locks are

enabled/disabled.Security Style UNIX, NTFS, or mixedStatus SnapMirror backup status: Normal, Snapvaulted, Snapmirrored, or Read-

only (if a SnapMirror destination)Volume Name of the volume to which the QTree belongs. Links to the NetApp

Volume Summary.Aggregate Name of the aggregate to which the QTree belongs.Links to the NetApp

Aggregate Summary.# of LUNs The number of LUNs mapped to the QTree. To view the specific LUN

information, see the LUN Utilization Summary.# of Shares The number of CIFS shares using this volume—links to NetApp CIFS

Summary# of Exports The number of NFS exports using this volume—links to NetApp NFS

Summary


NetApp Snapshot SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Snapshot SummaryNetApp snapshots use pointers to reference the blocks where the data is stored, thereby using a minimal amount of capacity. A snapshot captures a point-in-time image of the file system data. When the next snapshot is taken, the pointers will reference other blocks, as the file system data blocks have changed in the interval between snapshots. Therefore, the access time provides the time reference for the snapshot block usage. Snapshots provide a read-only source of data for backups to tape.


Name Name of the snapshot scheduleStorage Array Links to the NetApp Storage System DetailVolume Links to the NetApp Volume DetailsAccess Time Time the snapshot was created. This value does not change when the

snapshot is accessed.Total Blocks Number of 1024-byte blocks in this snapshotCumulative Blocks

Number of 1024-byte blocks—cumulative for current and previous snapshots

Dependency Lists the applications that depend on this snapshot: snapmirror, snapvault, dump, vclone, LUNs, or snaplock

Busy Indicates if an application is using the snapshotCumulative % of Used Blocks

The % of blocks used by this snapshot and all recent snapshots

Used Blocks Of all the blocks used on the volume, this is the % used by the snapshotCumulative % of Total Blocks

The % of blocks owned by this snapshot and all recent snapshots

% of Total Blocks

The % of all the volume’s blocks that is owned by this snapshot

NetApp Snapshot Summary 311

Array iSCSI Port UtilizationTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & Utilization

The NetApp storage systemName of the interfaceName of the target portal group that coordinates the iSCSI session with this NetApp systemNumeric ID of the disk storage target with which the portal group is associated (TPGT - target portal group tag). iSCSI portal groups that are associated with target nodes have a target group tag ranging from 0 to 65535.IP address or host name of the client initiator that is accessing the storage via the iSCSI portIdentifies the host’s connection to the storage targetMount point pathFile system pathFile system typeTotal capacity availableAmount of capacity in use

Then, click a # iSCSI Ports link.

Array NameiSCSI InterfaceTarget Portal Name

Target Group Tag

Host

Host iSCSI NameMount PointFile SystemFile System TypeCapacityUsed


NetApp Disk SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Disk Summary

Using the Report Designer, you can filter the output of this report using the following parameter selections:• Storage Array• RAID State• Disk Type


Name The Disk nameStorage Array The name of the NetApp storage systemAggregate The name of the associated aggregate, with a link to the NetApp

Aggregate Detail.Disk Type Disk Type: ATA, EATA, FCAL, LUN, SAS, SATA, SCSI, XATA,

XSAS, or unknown. Capacity The Disk’s total capacityVendor Disk VendorDisk Model Disk ModelRAID State RAID state: broken, copy, partner, pending, present, reconstructing,

spare, or zeroingRAID Type RAID type: pending, parity, dparity, or dataRAID Status Possible status: copying, degraded, foreign, growing, initializing,

invalid, ironing, mirror degraded, mirrored, needs check, noparity, normal, out-of-date, partial, raid0, raid4, raid_dp, reconstruct, resyncing, snapmirrored, verifying, unrecoverable

Serial # Disk serial numberRAID Group The RAID group to which the disk belongsFirmware Revision Disk firmware revision number

NetApp Disk Summary 313

NetApp Aggregates at RiskTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > NetApp Aggregates at RiskFor thin provisioning, it’s important to know when host usage is about to exceed the storage that was promised. The details shown in this aggregate report can help you understand the current physical capacity status. When an aggregate is at risk—the amount of used storage in the flexvol approaches the aggregate’s capacity—it can be re-sized to add physical disk space to the aggregate.See also, Thin Provisioning Overview.

Note: The Total Capacity value represents the amount of storage that has been committed or promised to hosts.

When you generate this report, you can select the threshold to report: Low, Warning, or Critical.


Aggregate The Aggregate number/ID link to NetApp Aggregate DetailStorage Array The NetApp system with which the aggregate is associated, which

drills down to NetApp Storage System DetailUsage Mouse over the usage thermometer to view the % availableTotal Capacity The aggregate’s total capacityAllocated Capacity Amount of capacity that has been allocated for useAvailable Capacity Remaining capacity available for useRAID Type raid0 (mirrored), raid4 (single disk for parity), or raid_dp (double-

parity protection)# Volumes at Risk Links to the NetApp Volumes at Risk# of Hosts at Risk Links to the NetApp Volumes at RiskList of Plexes Lists 1 or 2 Plexes—2 if SyncMirror is licensed and enabled. Links to

the NetApp Plex Details report.Risk Date The point at which the aggregate is at risk


NetApp Volumes at RiskTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > NetApp Volumes at RiskWhen you configure thin provisioning, you enable multiple volumes to access the same pool of free storage. Since thin provisioning “commits” more storage to hosts than is actually available, it is important to identify the remaining, usable storage and the point at which the aggregate is at risk of not having available storage. See also, Thin Provisioning Overview.

When you generate this report, you can select the threshold to report: Low, Warning, or Critical.

Volume Volume name link to NetApp Volume DetailsStorage Array The name of the NetApp storage system, which links to NetApp

Storage System DetailAggregate The name of the associated aggregate, with a link to the NetApp

Aggregate Detail.Aggregate Risk Date

The date at which the aggregate is expected to not have storage available for use

Space Guarantee The type of space that has been committed: volume, file, or none.Note that file or none indicates thin provisioning.

Usage Mouse over the thermometer to see the % available.Total Capacity Total capacity of the volume

NetApp Volumes at Risk 315


Thin Provisioning OverviewBy using an over-subscription strategy, thin provisioning technology addresses the issue of inefficient storage utilization. Applications are given physical space from a storage pool when data is written to the application, avoiding the pre-allocation commitment required by traditional storage provisioning approaches. In this way, an application can appear to have more storage than is actually reserved for it. As the application’s data grows, it can be given more storage from the storage pool, with minimal management intervention. With thin provisioning, existing capacity can be more efficiently used, eliminating the need for over-provisioning and often delaying the acquisition of additional storage. Often storage is over-promised and then actually dealt out as needed, making it incumbent upon the Storage Administrator to monitor storage usage so that an application’s write requests can be fulfilled without failures. StorageConsole provides the following key NetApp reports to facilitate this monitoring process:• NetApp Aggregates at Risk• NetApp Volumes at Risk

Allocated Capacity Amount of the volume’s capacity that has been allocatedAvailable Capacity Amount of the volume’s capacity that is availableHost Name The host that is at risk of consuming more than the space guaranteed to

it.Host Usage Mouse over the thermometer bar to view the estimated % used by the

host.Mount Points The host’s mount points that are using the storageHost Capacity The capacity of the hostEstimate Used Estimated amount of storage used by the hostEstimate Available Estimated storage available for host consumption


APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 17Chapter 15IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports

This chapter covers the following topics:• Overview of IBM Array Support• Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Enterprise Array View)• IBM Array Site Summary• IBM Array Summary• IBM Array Detail• IBM Rank Summary• IBM Extent Pool Summary• IBM Disk Summary

317

Overview of IBM Array SupportAPTARE StorageConsole supports data collection and reporting on the following LSI-based arrays. The LSI-based arrays include IBM DS/ESS and Sun StorageTek series, as well as SGI InfiniteStorage and Teradata Storage Systems.

IBM Arrays Sun Arrays LSIStorage System DS3300 Sun StorageTek 2510 LSI 1532Storage System DS3400 Sun StorageTek 2540 LSI 1932Storage System DS4700 Express Model 70

Sun StorageTek 6140 LSI 3992

Storage System DS4700 Express Model 72

Sun StorageTek 6140 LSI 3992

Storage System DS4800 Model 80 Sun StorageTek 6540 LSI 6998Storage System DS4800 Model 88 Sun StorageTek 6540 LSI 6998Storage System DS5000 Series Sun StorageTek 6780 LSI 7900


Pre-Requisites for IBM Array Data CollectionFor System Administrators, detailed installation pre-requisites are documented in the Data Collector Installation Guide for Capacity Manager. A subset is included here for quick reference.

Table 17.1 Capacity Manager Data Collector Access Methods

Storage Array Access Methods and Pre-Requisites

IBM Subsystem (3000 & 4000 Series)

• IBM SMCLI—verify that SMCLI is installed on the Data Collector server.

• Location of the SMCLI:UNIX: /opt/SM8/client/Windows: C:\Program Files\SM8\client\

IBM Enterprise (6000 & 8000 Series)

• IBM DSCLI—verify that DSCLI is installed on the Data Collector server.• Location of the DSCLI:

UNIX: /opt/ibm/dscliWindows: C:\Program Files\IBM\dscli

• Locate the profile file, typically in the /profile sub-directory and named dscli.profile. In this file, un-comment the Output Format property and set it to XML, as shown in the following example.

# Output format type for ls commands, which can take one of the following values:# default: Default output

# xml : XML format

# delim : delimit columns using a character specified by "delim"# stanza : Horizontal table format

# "format" is equivalent to option "-fmt default|xml|delim|stanza".

format: xml

• A User account with monitor group privileges on the array is required.

Pre-Requisites for IBM Array Data Collection 319

Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Enterprise Array View)The following illustration represents an example of the view available for IBM Enterprise Arrays (6K/8K). For a description of the fields displayed, see IBM Array Detail.

Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Subsystem Array View)The following examples shows an IBM Subsystem (3K) array.


IBM Array Site SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Array Site SummaryFour or eight disk drive modules comprise an Array Site. Then, one or two Array Sites comprise an Array. An Array is an Array Site that has been formatted to a specific RAID format.

Understanding IBM Enterprise Storage Capacity Calculations• Capacity values for IBM arrays may appear different from what is reported by the IBM CLI

or IBM Tools, as IBM uses a decimal gigabyte—10^9 bytes, while StorageConsole uses 1024 for a KB when converting to GB.

• For FB open systems hosts, an extent is 1 GB. For CKD IBM zSeries or S/390 systems, an extent is 1 cylinder (.92 GB).

In the Report Designer, you can narrow the report output by selecting values for the following criteria:• State: Assigned, Unassigned, Unavailable• Disk Classes: ENT, NL

Array Site The Array Site ID

Storage Array The physical storage system; Drill down to the IBM Array Detail.

DA Pair

Device adapter pair number—the physical I/O enclosure locationIf the DA Pair is an even number, it indicates the first DA pair in the enclosure; an odd number indicates the second DA pair in the enclosure

Capacity The capacity of all disks belonging to the Array Site

# of Disks Number of disks associated with this Array Site. Links to the IBM Disk Summary.

IBM Array Site Summary 321

Array Name Links to the IBM Array Summary.

Disk RPM The disk revolutions per minute, such as 10000 or 15000

State

assigned, unassigned, unavailable, initializing. Indicates if the array site is assigned to the array. If the state is unavailable, its capacity is not included in the total array capacity calculation, as shown in the Array Capacity and Utilization report.

Disk Class Enterprise fibre channel drives (ENT) or Nearline ATA drives (NL)


IBM Array SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Array Summary




In the Report Designer, you can narrow the report output by selecting values for the following criteria:• State: Assigned, Unassigned, Unavailable• RAID Types: 5, 6, 10• Disk Classes: ENT, NL

Array The Array ID. An Array (also known as a RAID Array) is an Array Site that has been formatted to a specific RAID format.

Storage Array The physical storage array system

Array State assigned, unassigned, unavailableIndicates if the data is assigned to a Rank.

RAID Type RAID 5, 6, or 10

# of Array Sites Drill down to the IBM Array Site Summary for details. An array can have 1 or 2 array sites.

Rank Drill down to the IBM Rank Summary.

IBM Array Summary 323

DA Pair

Device adapter pair number—the physical I/O enclosure locationIf the DA Pair is an even number, it indicates the first DA pair in the enclosure; an odd number indicates the second DA pair in the enclosure

CapacityThe capacity of the Array (also known as the RAID Array)—one or more Array Sites can comprise an array and the capacity shown is the total for all the Array Sites in the array.



IBM Array DetailThis report is accessed via a link from other IBM Array reports.To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Array SummaryThen, click an Array.




IBM Storage System Summary

Storage Unit The Storage Unit ID contains the manufacturer, machine type, and serial number

Storage Image The Storage Image ID contains the manufacturer, machine type, and serial number

Model The storage unit model

State State of the storage unit: online, offline, resuming, quiescing, quiesce exception, forced quiescing, fenced, discovery

Product Storage Unit vendor

# FC Ports Number of Fibre Channel ports; links to the Array Port Utilization report

# Disks Number of disks for this storage unit

IBM Array Detail 325

Raw Capacity

Total array capacity derived from the physical DDMs (disk drive modules); specifically, the DDM usage in the array siteAmount of capacity that has been allocated is derived from DDM usage for array members and sparesAmount of capacity that is free, derived from unassigned and unconfigured DDMsMouse over the thermometer to view the usage percentage

Array Site Capacity

The number of array sites to which this array belongsLinks to the IBM Array Site SummarySum of the capacity of all the associated array sites, derived from the capacity of the disks in each array siteSum of the array site capacity that is in used—that is, “assigned” to an arrayArray Site storage that has not been allocated—that is, “unassigned” to an arrayMouse over the thermometer to view the usage percentage

Array Capacity

Links to the IBM Array Summary

The capacity of the Array (also known as the RAID Array)—one or more Array Sites can comprise an array and the capacity shown is the total for all the Array Sites in the array.If an array is assigned to a rank, it is “used”

Array capacity that is not part of a rank is “available”

Mouse over the thermometer to view the usage percentage.

Rank Capacity

Array Site Used Amount of array storage used by the Array Site

# of Hosts Number of hosts mapped to this arrayLinks to the Host Capacity & Utilization

Host Usage Amount of capacity used by hosts

Capacity

Allocated Size

Available Size

Raw Capacity Usage

# of Array Sites

Array Site Capacity

Array Site Used

Array Site Available

Array Site Usage

# of Arrays

Array Capacity

Array Used

Array Available

Array Usage

# of Ranks The number of ranks links to the IBM Rank Summary

Total Capacity Sum of the capacity of all ranks


Extent Pool Capacity

Links to the IBM Extent Pool Summary; both FB and CKD are included in this number.The sum of the capacity of all the fixed block extents in the extent pool; For FB, an extent is 1 GB.

The amount of fixed block extent pool storage in assigned to a logical volumeThe fixed block extent pool storage that is not assigned to a logical volume

Mouse over the thermometer to view the percentage of the fixed block extent pool that is allocated.The sum of the capacity of all the CKD extents in the extent pool; For CKD, an extent is 1 cylinder (.92 GB).

The amount of the CKD extent pool storage assigned to a logical volume

The CKD extent pool storage that is not assigned to a logical volume

Mouse over the thermometer to view the percentage of the CKD extent pool that is allocated.

Used Capacity Capacity assigned to an extent pool

Available Capacity Capacity not assigned to an extent pool

Rank Usage Mouse over the thermometer to view the percentage of the ranks that have been allocated.

# of Extent Pools

FB Extent Pool Capacity

FB Extent Pool Used

FB Extent Pool Available

FB Extent Pool Usage

CKD Extent Pool Capacity

CKD Extent Pool Used

CKD Extent Pool Available

CKD Extent Pool Usage


Logical Volumes

This section provides the LUN mapping for determining capacity and usage.


Sum of the capacity of all the fixed block volumes for this array

Links to the LUN Utilization Summary showing a list of allocated LUNsSum of all the fixed block volume capacity that has been allocated

The number of unallocated fixed block volumes

The fixed block capacity that is not in allocated

Number of CKD volumes

Sum of the capacity of all the CKD volumes for this array

Top 3 of n RanksClick on the link to view the complete list of Ranks.

Top 3 of n Extent PoolsClick on the link to view the complete list of Extent Pools.Either 1 or 2 Ranks can comprise an Extent Pool. When it is a 1-to-1 relationship, the Extent Pool capacity values will look identical to the Rank values. Otherwise, they will be double the Rank values. All Ranks in an Extent Pool are of the same RAID type.

# of FB Volumes

Total FB Capacity

# of Allocated FB

FB Allocated Capacity

# of Unallocated FB

FB Unallocated Capacity

# of CKD

CKD Capacity

Name Rank name links to the IBM Rank Summary

Usage Used Extents in the Rank

Total Extents Total Extents in the Rank

AvailableExtents in this Rank that are available for allocation in the Extent Pools; If the available amount equals the total amount, it indicates that the rank is not allocated to any Extent Pools.

Name Extent Pool name links to the IBM Extent Pool Summary

Usage Amount of Extent capacity that is in use


IBM Storage System Capacity DetailMouse over the bars to view the capacity totals in GB.

IBM Storage System FB VolumesA pie chart represents fixed block volumes:• Ungrouped• Unmapped• Mapped

Mouse over the pie segments to view percentages.

Capacity and Object Usage ForecastGraphs represent forecasted usage for the following objects:• Array Sites• Arrays• Extent Pools• Ranks

Total Extents Total Extent capacity

Available Available Extent capacity


IBM Rank SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Rank SummaryAn IBM Rank is logical storage, enabling storage provisioning that is not constrained by the size of an array. One or more arrays comprise an IBM Rank, forming logically contiguous storage. Note that IBM often refers to Arrays as RAID Arrays.




In the Report Designer, you can narrow the report output by selecting values for the following criteria:• State: Normal, Configuring, Unassigned, Reserved, Deconfiguring, Depopulating,

Configuration Error, Deconfiguration Error• RAID Types: 5, 6, 10• Storage Types: fb, ckd

Rank The name of the group of arrays

Storage System The physical storage system on which the rank resides


State

The Configuration State: Normal, Configuring, Unassigned, Reserved, Deconfiguring, Depopulating, Configuration Error, Deconfiguration ErrorA rank remains in an unassigned state until it is assigned to an Extent Pool.

Data State

Normal - If no other data state issues, it is Normal. Note that an unassigned array will have a Normal data state Degraded - A disk drive module in the array may be rebuilding. Read Only - Possible issues: one or more disk drive modules have failed; there aren’t enough spares available for rebuilding; data loss could occur if writes continue without redundancy. Failed - Possible causes: Two or more disk drive modules have failed; disk drive modules aren’t available for rebuilding data. Repairing - Array repair could be accepted, but not yet complete Inaccessible - The storage image can’t access all the data on the array.

Group The Rank Group is either 0 or 1, corresponding to the Extent Pool ID.

Raid Type RAID 5, 6, or 10

Storage Type Fixed block (FB) or Count-Key-Data (CKD)

Total Capacity The rank’s total capacity; the capacity is derived from the number of extents

Used Capacity Amount of storage used by the rank

Available Capacity Amount of the Rank storage that is available for use

Total Extents The total number of Extents, striped across the disks in the array

Used Extents The number of partitions/extents that are in use.

Available Extents The number of extents available for use

ArrayThe arrays that comprise the Rank. An Array (also known as a RAID Array) is an Array Site that has been formatted to a specific RAID format.

# of Array Sites 1 or more Array Sites comprise an Array, from which the Rank is configured

Extent Pool Name Links to the IBM Extent Pool Summary

IBM Rank Summary 331

IBM Extent Pool SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Extent Pool Summary




In the Report Designer, you can narrow the report output by selecting values for the following criteria:• Storage Types: fb, ckd• Rank Status: below, exceeded, full

Name Extent Pool name

Storage System The physical storage system (storage array) on which the extent pool resides

Rank Group A rank can only be assigned to one extent pool, but more than one rank can reside in an extent pool.

Storage Type Fixed block (FB) or Count-Key-Data (CKD)For FB, an extent is 1 GB. For CKD, an extent is 1 cylinder (.92 GB).

Status

Rank Status: below - % of available extents is less than threshold exceeded - % of available extents is greater than threshold full - 0 extents are available

Total Capacity Sum of the capacity of all extents in this pool

Available CapacityThe amount of space in this extent pool that is currently available; this value is derived from the total capacity minus the allocated capacity

Available Extents The number of extents that are available to the logical volume


Reserved Extents The number of extents that are in reserved (this space must be explicitly released before the logical volume can use it)

# of Volumes The number of logical volumes that have been configured from this extent pool; this is the storage that can be given to a host

# of Ranks The number of ranks in this extent pool—1 or 2

IBM Extent Pool Summary 333

IBM Disk SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Disk Summary

• In the Report Designer, you can narrow the report output by selecting values for the following criteria:

• Disk State: Normal, New, Installing, Verifying, Formatting, Initializing, Certifying, Rebuilding, PFSed, Inter failed, Inappropriate, Removed, Failed, Failed - Deferred

• Disk Usage: unassigned, unconfigured, spare required, spare not required, array member• Disk Classes: ENT, NL

ID Disk ID

Storage Array The physical storage array system

Array Site The array site ID links to the IBM Array Site Summary. If a disk is not in an array site, it is available for other use.


Model The disk model identifier

Disk Usage How this disk is currently being used: unassigned, unconfigured, spare required, spare not required, array member


Disk Interface FCAL, SATA, SAS

Disk RPM The disk revolutions per minute, such as 10000 or 15000

Disk Rate The minimum disk interface rate for the disks in the array site

StateNormal, New, Installing, Verifying, Formatting, Initializing, Certifying, Rebuilding, PFSed, Inter failed, Inappropriate, Removed, Failed, Failed - Deferred

Capacity The disk’s capacity

IBM Disk Summary 335


APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 18Chapter 17HDS Dynamic Provisioning Reports

This chapter covers the following topics:• Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Summary• Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Utilization• Hitachi Disk Summary• Array Capacity & Utilization (Hitachi Arrays & HDP View)

337

Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Hitachi DP Pool SummaryThe Dynamic Provisioning Pool uses virtual volumes for data storage, with actual capacity available upon request to a host writing to LUN storage. Use this report to ensure that your pool always has sufficient free capacity, enabling on-demand provisioning to hosts.

Pool ID The name of the Dynamic Provisioning Pool

Storage Array The storage array on which the pool resides

Used

Mouse over the thermometer to view the percentage of the pool that is used. Used capacity is the total capacity of all the pages that have data written to them; that is, consumed or touched storage. The percentage is the used size divided by the total physical capacity.

Capacity This is the total size of all DP pool volumes that have been created within the pool.

Allocated This is storage that can be written to by a host.

Consumed This is consumed or touched capacity; that is, the sum of the 42 MB pages assigned from the pool that have data written to them.

Available SizeCapacity - Used Size = Available Size. Monitor this space to ensure that you do not deplete the available space in a pool, ensuring that host requests for storage are not denied

Threshold1 Threshold1 is a user definable threshold used to monitor consumed DP pool capacity.

Threshold2 This threshold is hard-coded in the firmware of the array.


Number of DP Pool VOLs

The number of VOLs in this DP Pool; links to the LUN Utilization Summary to view the LDEVs that have been allocated to the DP Pool.

Number of DP VOLsThe number of virtual volumes in this Dynamic Provisioning pool; links to the LUN Utilization Summary. This is capacity that is available to be allocated to hosts; associated capacity.

Capacity of DP VOLs

This is the capacity of all DP Volumes that have been allocated to hosts. It also includes overhead for dynamic provisioning. This capacity could be over-subscribed, which means that the capacity shown here could exceed the capacity shown in the Capacity column.

Status Reported by Device Manager: Normal, Blocked, Over Threshold

Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Summary 339

Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool UtilizationTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Hitachi DP Pool UtilizationThis dashboard provides an at-a-glance view of dynamically provisioned storage, enabling insight into potential exposure, as well as, storage that may be reclaimable.

Pool ID The name of the Dynamic Provisioning Pool

Array The storage array on which the pool resides

Associated

Of the DP Vols that have been created in the pool, Associated storage represents potential promised capacity; that is, the amount of storage that can be given to a host. The Associated Warning line defaults to 170%.

Allocated

The green bar in the chart indicates exposure; this is storage that can be written to by a host. When the green bar crosses the Capacity line, there is potential that hosts may attempt to write to storage that is not physically available. The Allocated Warning line defaults to 70%.

Unallocated Unallocated = Capacity - Allocated storage

Consumed

This is Consumed, or touched capacity; that is, the sum of the 42 MB pages assigned from the pool that have data written to them. Consumed could be greater than Allocated, in cases where de-provisioned hosts have not had storage reclaimed. Consumed can never exceed capacity, but as it nears capacity, this chart provides an indication of a potential issue.


Reclaimable StorageThere are times when storage is not in use, yet it’s difficult to make that determination. For example, a host can be de-provisioned and therefore the storage is un-masked, but data remains on the disk. These pages could be freed up and storage reclaimed. In the Hitachi DP Pool Utilization report, storage may be reclaimable when the Consumed value is greater than the Allocated value.

Capacity

This is the total physical size of all DP pool volumes that have been created within the pool. When Allocated (green bar) crosses this line, there may not be storage available for future writes. Note that the Threshold 1 line represents a % of capacity that is user-defined. If not customized, Threshold 1 defaults to 70%.

Threshold1 This is a user-definable threshold to monitor pool usage. If not customized by the user, the default value is 70%.

Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Utilization 341

Hitachi Disk SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Hitachi Disk Summary

Device Name The name of the disk

Storage Array The storage array in which the disk is located; links to the Array Capacity & Utilization report

Group Name The group to which the disk belongs; links to the Array Group Details report

Capacity Capacity of the disk

Vendor Vendor of the disk

Serial # Serial number of the disk

Model Disk model

Firmware Version The disk’s firmware version

RPM Disk revolutions per minute

Disk Type FC, SATA, BD, SAS, or Unknown

Chassis # The chassis number

Role unknown, data, unallocated, offline, outofservice, spare, spareunitialized, n/a


Array Capacity & Utilization (Hitachi Arrays & HDP View)To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & UtilizationThe Array Capacity and Utilization report provides an overview of storage array capacity and utilization. Use this report to identify storage arrays that are underutilized or highly utilized. The Array Capacity & Utilization report represents Hitachi Arrays and Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning (HDP) in the following manner:

Storage Array

The name that you assigned to the array. Available values include all supported storage devices. From here you can drill down to the array. For a list of supported devices, see the APTARE StorageConsole Certified Configurations Guide.

FamilyThe family classification of the storage array as assigned by the vendor. Use this name to ascertain the vendor’s product specifications.

Type The specific model of the storage array.

Vendor The name of the vendor that distributes the storage array.

ProductThe name of the product, typically shown as a series number. This field provides an indicator of capacity specifications, such as LUNs, hosts per array, and drives per array.

# Ports The number of ports in the array. Click on this link to view the Array Port Utilization.

# Disks The number of disks in the array.

Array Capacity & Utilization (Hitachi Arrays & HDP View) 343

# Hosts

This is the total number of unique hosts that have LUNs assigned by this storage array, and the hosts have been successfully queried using one or more host resource policies. If zero, host resources data has not been collected. Click on the Hosts link to go to the Host Capacity & Utilization report.

Host Usage Links to the LUN Utilization Summary report.

% Used The percentage of the storage that is currently used.

Capacity

For HDS arrays: Sum of capacity of all PDEVs from all array groups. Capacity Manager assumes that all PDEVs are part of an array group, so PDEVs that are marked as “not included in an array group” (-1) are included in the capacity calculation. That is, no disks are treated as spares.

Allocated Size

Total raw capacity of the LUNs in the array that have been mapped to a host. These LUNs are typically configured as volumes on the host and dedicated to an application.Unallocated storage is storage that is not part of an Array Group.

Available SizeTotal raw capacity of the array that has not been carved into a RAID group. The size is displayed in the units you selected with the Advanced option when you generated the report.

% Available


Raw UsageExpressed as a percentage, total capacity of the LUNs in the array that have been assigned to a host and that are not available for provisioning.

# RAID Groups The number of array groups in the storage array. Links to List Array Groups.

RAID Groups Capacity

Total capacity of the array groups in the storage array.

Local Capacity All the capacity from the attached disks

Logical Virtual Capacity


RAID Groups Used Total used capacity of the array groups (by LUNs) in the storage array.

RAID Groups Available

Available capacity of the array groups in the storage array.

RAID Group Usage Thermometer with mouse-over that displays the percentage used

# Pools The number of dynamic provisioning pools links to the Dynamic Provisioning Pool Summary


Capacity The Dynamic Provisioning capacity for this array

Used Amount of the dynamically provisioned capacity in use

Free Amount of the dynamically provisioned capacity that is available

DP Usage Mouse over this thermometer to view the usage.

# LUNs Number of LUNs present in the storage array

Total LUN Capacity Sum of the capacity of all LUNS for the storage array

# Open Allocated LUNs

The number of open LUNs (volumes) that have set paths.

Open Alloc LUN Capacity

Represents the capacity of the open LUNs (volumes) that have set paths.

# Open Unallocated LUNs

The number of open LUNs that do not have set paths.

Open Unalloc LUN Capacity

The capacity of the open LUNs that do not have set paths.

# Open Reserved LUNs

These are reserved LUNs that cannot be assigned to hosts; for example, dynamic pool capacity. No paths can be set for these LUNs.

Open Resv LUN Capacity

This is the capacity of the reserved LUNs that cannot be assigned to hosts; for example, dynamic pool capacity. No paths can be set for these LUNs.

LUN Usage The percentage of the LUN that is allocated.

Array Capacity & Utilization (Hitachi Arrays & HDP View) 345


logicalAPTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 19Chapter 17Virtualization Manager Reports

APTARE StorageConsole provides insight into Virtual Machine performance and the capacity utilization of mapped datastores. Virtualization Manager offers reports on storage resource utilization at the file system and virtual disk levels for each VM. In additional, forecasting reports predict future storage capacity needs in virtualized environments.The data collected on Virtual Machine storage is displayed in the reports described in this chapter. Using these reports, you can identify unused, reclaimable storage.This chapter covers the following topics:• Virtualization Terminology• Overview of Virtualization Manager• VM Server Summary• VM Server Detail• VM Summary• VM Detail• VM Files Summary• Datastore Utilization• Datastore Detail• Datastore Usage Breakdown• Physical Disk Utilization• Physical Disk Detail• VM Performance Summary• VM Performance Over Time• Datastore Performance Summary• Physical Disk Performance Summary• Physical Disk Performance Over Time• VM Size Forecast• Datastore Capacity Forecast

347

Virtualization TerminologyThe following terms are defined in the context of APTARE StorageConsole Virtualization Manager.Note: The usage of VM refers to a Virtual Machine, not Virtualization Manager.

Capacity: DatastoreThe capacity of all the datastores hosting a Virtual Machine File System (VMFS) or, for NAS storage, a Network File System (NFS).

Capacity: LogicalAlso known as the Virtual Disks or Volume, this is the capacity of the virtual machine, derived from the virtual machine’s VMDK file(s).

Datastore

The datastore is the container for the VMs and their configuration files, Virtual Disks, and other files, such as the ISO files that are used for installing a virtual machine. A datastore provides the vir-tual storage resources via mapping to physical storage on DAS SCSI, FC SAN arrays, iSCSI, or NAS drives. The datastore is the storage provisioning source for one or more VMs on one or more hosts.

VM Server

The physical server (bare metal box) that is hosting the VMs via the virtualization software, such as ESX. Virtual machines reside on a VM Server, sometimes referred to as a Virtual Host or Vir-tual Machine Server.

Physical (Raw) Disk

A VM can use either a virtual disk or it can access the host machine’s physical disk drive: Raw Device Mapping or Raw Disk Map (RDM) file. Raw disk mapping to a LUN may have been chosen in order to optimize performance.

Virtual Disks

Also known as a Virtual Hard Drive or Virtual Machine Images (.VMDK file), this is the storage that is available to a guest oper-ating system. It appears as a physical disk to the guest operating system, but it actually is a file that encapsulates the OS, applica-tions, and data files of the VM. The VMDK file is accessed as if it were a physical hard disk. VMDK files can be either on the host or stored remotely.

VM Guest

Also known as a VM Instance; the logical server running on a VM Server.

Note: All host names within a domain must be unique, especially when VM cloning occurs.

Virtual Host See VM Server.

Virtual Machine (VM)

The container for the guest operating system and applications; each VM is separate from all other VMs, even though they may share physical resources, such as memory and storage devices.


VM Server

VM Server is used throughout the reports to represent the physi-cal server that is hosting the Virtual Machines‚ for example, the physical server running ESX.See VM Server or Virtual Host.

VMDK See Virtual Disks. Note that for Raw Mapping (RDM), the VMDK file simply contains the metadata to map to a LUN.

VMFS

The Virtual Machine File System, with a hierarchical directory, provides the structure for managing access to shared, clustered storage. Each VM has a single subdirectory in the VMFS volume for the VMDK files (virtual disks). For raw disk mapping, the VMFS is mounted on the Virtual Machine.

Volume

The Volume is the storage that is exposed to the OS (filesystems mounted it on it). A Volume maps to logical disks, such as C:\ and D:\, as seen by the guest OS. These logical disks can be:• Virtual Disks, which are VMDK files that contain the actual

data that is part of a datastore. • Raw Mapping, which is a small VMDK file that contains the

metadata that maps to a LUN.Note: Volume Usage shown in StorageConsole reports represents logical disk usage.

Virtualization Terminology 349

Overview of Virtualization ManagerUsing APTARE StorageConsole Virtualization Manager, you can optimize storage allocation to virtual systems to improve efficiency and reduce costs. Virtualization Manager complements your virtual management console, with reports that can help you determine if storage resources are over- or under-utilized and if applications running in the virtual environment are contributing to storage access bottlenecks. With Virtualization Manager, you can easily view the virtual-to-physical relationships to understand what virtual systems are consuming physical storage, and more importantly, how much of that storage is consumed by out-dated, unnecessary snapshot files.For additional details, see Virtualization Terminology.

Understanding the DatastoreSince APTARE StorageConsole Virtualization Manager maps the VMs to the actual physical storage, it is important to understand the Datastore. The Datastore is the container for the VMs and their configuration files, VM disks, and other files, such as the ISO files that are used for installing a virtual machine. A Datastore can be located on DAS SCSI, FC SAN arrays, iSCSI, or NAS drives. The Datastore is the storage provisioning source for one or more VMs, on one or more hosts, mapping to one or more physical storage devices.


All of the objects managed by VMware vCenter comprise the VM inventory: hosts, clusters, VMs, and Networks.

Characteristics of a Datastore• Configured as a clustered file system• Configured per host, but multiple hosts can point to the same datastore• Managed at the host level and the data center level• Datastore path format:

[<datastore>] <path>

where <datastore> is the datastore name and <path> is a slash-delimited path from the root of the datastore. Example: [storage] win2k/testing/bue11dtesting.vmx

Using Virtualization Manager for Planning and MonitoringUsing Virtualization Manager, you have the tools to effectively plan the deployment of virtual machines in your enterprise and then follow through with monitoring storage allocation and usage. In concert with Capacity Manager and Backup Manager, you have the ability to monitor all aspects of your storage environment and you can ensure that your data is sufficiently protected.Virtualization Manager offers the following solutions:

Virtual Environment Administration Reports for Planning & Monitoring• Determine optimal deployment of

Virtual Machines• VM Size Forecast

• Identify storage access bottlenecks • VM Server Summary• VM Performance Summary

• Reclaim space• Identify VM files that are taking up

storage, but are not in the VM Inventory

• VM Summary - Choose a Datastore and drill down to the details to determine file system allocations.

• VM Files Summary

Overview of Virtualization Manager 351

VM Server SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Administration Reports > VM Server SummaryUse this report to view the list of Virtual Machine Servers, with drilldown access to reports that provide details to help you determine what is using the space on a datastore.View Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.

The VM Server Summary lists the VM Servers within your selected scope; that is, the physical servers that are hosting the VMs.When running this report, the following mutually exclusive scope selections are available:• Server Group• DatastoreNote: When using Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports to filter rows by the Indicator Lights (for example, Status or Hardware Health) use the color: Red, Yellow, Green, or Gray.

Name Name of the VM Server that is hosting the virtual server; for example, the ESX host

IP Address IP address of the VM Server

State VM connection state: Connected, Not Responding, Disconnected, None

Status Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, definite problem. When filtering the report on this field, use the color.

Hardware HealthIndicates the overall health of the host’s hardware: None, Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert. When filtering the report on this field, use the color.

# CPUs Total number of processors in the virtual machine

Avg CPU Usage Last 24 Hrs

The host’s average CPU usage for the past 24 hours‚ for the number of samples taken within that timeframe

Total Memory Total memory capacity of the VM Server.

Avg Mem Usage Last 24 Hrs

The VM Server’s average memory usage for the past 24 hours‚ for the number of samples taken within that timeframe


# Disks

The number of disks that the VM Server can access‚ either internal disks or LUNs. Drill down to the Physical Disk Utilization. Note that the disks are specific to the VM server, whereas the Datastore utilization may be using both VM Server disks and disks apart from the VM Server disks.

UnallocatedAmount of disk space that is unallocated. Mouse over this thermometer to view the total, unallocated, and percentage unallocated. Click on this thermometer to view the Physical Disk Utilization.

# Datastores The number of datastores provisioned to the VM Server; drill down to the Datastore Utilization report

Datastore UsageMouse over the thermometer bar to view the total datastore capacity, the amount used, and the % of the total used. Drill down to the Datastore Capacity Forecast.

# Active VMsA VM is active when it is powered on. An inactive VM is in the inventory, but is powered off. This column shows the number of active VMs. Drill down to the VM Summary.

# Total VMs The total number of VMs in the inventory, both active and inactive. Drill down to the VM Summary.

VM Server Summary 353

VM Server DetailThis report can be accessed via the Name link in the VM Server Summary report.Note: VMTools must be installed to enable collection of the IP address, Host name, mount points, and guest operating system of the VM.

VM and VM Disk Size ExampleIn the VM Server Detail shown above, the VM size is greater than the VM Disk size.• VM Size = the sum of all files for this VM (including snapshot files), indicating the amount

of storage that the VM is actually using• VM Disk Size = the amount of space that was presented to the Guest OS when the VM was

created and configured

Given these definitions, your task would be to determine what is taking up all the storage for this VM. Often, a number of stale, unneeded snapshot files can be removed to free up space.• Click on the VM Name to view the VM Detail with the list of snapshots and VM Files.• View the VM Files list, where the file path identifies the directory where the data is stored.• From a Datastore perspective, view the Datastore Utilization and drill down to the Datastore

Detail to identify the physical disks associated with a VM’s storage utilization.


Summary Data

Name Name of the VM Server that is hosting the virtual server; for example, the ESX host

Host Name Hostname of the guest; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed; links to Server Details

IP Address IP address of the Virtual Machine; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed

State Network adapter connection state: Connected, Not Responding, Disconnected, None

Status Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, a definite problem

Hardware Health Indicates the overall health of the host’s hardware: None, Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert

System Vendor Host vendor

System Model Model of the host system

VM Server Detail 355

Performance & Forecast

Largest VMsClick the link to access the full list of the largest VMs, listed in descending order, with the top storage-consuming VMs at the top of the list.Note: VMTools must be installed to enable collection of the IP address, Host name, mount points, and guest operating system of the VM.

For a description of these fields, see VM Summary.DatastoresFor a description of the fields in this table, see Datastore Utilization.

Total Memory Total memory available as a resource to the VMs on this host

Total CPU Total CPU available as a resource to the VMs on this host

CPU Vendor Processor’s vendor

CPU Description Type of processor

CPU Speed Processor speed

# HBAs/Ports Number of host bus adapters and ports on the VM Server

# NICs Number of physical network interface cards

NIC Speed Speed of the interface cards

# Total VMs Number of VMs configured on this host and in the inventory

# Active VMs A VM is active when it is in the inventory and powered on; it is inactive if it is in the inventory, but powered off.

# Datastores Number of datastores that this VM Server is using

Datastore Usage Amount of storage in the datastore that this VM Server is using

# Disks The number of disks that the VM Server can access‚ either internal disks or LUNs. Drill down to the Physical Disk Utilization.

Unallocated DiskMouse over the thermometer bar to view the total disk capacity, the amount used, and the % of the total used. Drill down to the Physical Disk Utilization.

Version Version of the virtual server software, such as ESX

Last Updated Timestamp of last data collection

Average and Maximum usage graphed over time‚ for the number of samples taken within that timeframeAverage and Maximum usage graphed over time‚ for the number of samples taken within that timeframe

CPU

Memory


DisksThese are the physical disks that are available to the VM Server.For a description of the fields in this table, see Physical Disk Utilization.

VM SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Administration Reports > VM SummaryUse this report to find the largest Virtual Machines.Note: VMTools must be installed to enable collection of the IP address, Host name, mount points, and guest operating system of the VM.

View Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.

Note: When using Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports to filter rows by the Indicator Lights (for example, Connection, Power, or Status) use the color: Red, Yellow, Green, or Gray.

VM Summary 357

VM Name Name of the Virtual Machine

VM Server The server that is hosting the VM

Host Name Hostname of the guest; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed

IP Address IP address of the Virtual Machine; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed

State: Connection None, Connected, or Suspended

State: Power Powered Off, Powered On

StatusThis is essentially an alarm indicator that reflects the condition of the resources: Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, definite problem

Avg CPU Usage Last 24 Hours

The host’s average CPU usage for the past 24 hours‚ for the number of samples taken within that timeframe

Avg Memory Usage Last 24 Hrs

The host’s average Memory usage for the past 24 hours‚ for the number of samples taken within that timeframe

Size: VMSize of the virtual machine, which includes VMDK files, log files, and snapshots; the sum of all the files taking up storage by this VM.See VM and VM Disk Size Example.

Size: VM DiskThis is the amount of storage that was configured and presented to the Guest OS when the virtual disk was originally created for the VM.See VM and VM Disk Size Example.

Volume Usage

This is the disk usage inside of the VM (for example, C:\, D:\) A Volume maps to logical disks, such as C:\ and D:\, as seen by the guest OS; usage for the past 24 hours‚ for the number of samples taken within that timeframe. For inactive VMs, the usage is unknown.

Datastore Usage Datastores used by this VM


VM DetailThis report can be accessed via the Name link in the VM Summary report.

VM Detail 359

Summary Data

Name of the virtual machine

Hostname of the guest; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed

IP address of the Virtual Machine; value is displayed only if VMTools is installedLinks to the VM Server Detail report

Amount of storage the VM takes up

Indicates if the VMware tools have been installed for the guest operating systemVersion of the VMware tools that are running on the guest operating systemNone, Powered Off, Powered On, or Suspended

None, Powered Off, Powered On, or Suspended

Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, definite problemThe VM’s power-on time

The time when the VM was put in a suspended state

The datastore to which the VM belongsLinks to the Datastore Detail reportThe resource pool (compartment) to which the VM belongs

The last time the VM configuration was updated

Path and name of the current snapshot

The file path in datastore format, for example: [storage] win2k/testing/bue11dtesting.vmx

Guest operating system running on the VM

The annotation field of the VM

Performance & ForecastNote: The default StorageConsole polling interval is set to every 5 hours, however, this can be customized.

Name

Host Name

IP Address

VM Server

VM Size

VMware Tools

Tools Version

Connection State

Power State

Status

Boot Time

Suspend Time

Datastore

Resource Pool

Last Update Date

Current Snapshot

VM Path Name

System OS

Notes

CPU The CPU average and maximum usage to date.

Memory The Memory average and maximum usage to date.


VM Size Over TimeDisplays the average and maximum VM storage usage to date.

VolumesThis table lists the local disks seen by the virtual machine, such as C:\, D:\.For a description of the fields in this table, see Logical Disk Utilization.

Disks

The label of the physical disk

RDISK = raw, physical disk; Capacity will be N/A for RDISKs VDISK = virtual diskThe storage potential of the virtual disk

The datastore to which the virtual disk belongs

The LUN on which the virtual disk’s storage is located

Array in which the disk resides

1 = Persistent - immediate, permanent changes 2 = Non-persistent - changes do not persist once VM is powered off 3 = Undoable - user determines how and when changes are saved 4 = Append - changes appended to a log when VM is powered off

This table provides the details for the physical disks in the VM.

SnapshotsA tree structure represents the Snapshots for this VM.Example:

Disk Label

Disk Type

Capacity

Datastore

LUN

Array

Mode

VM Detail 361

VM FilesFor a description of the fields in this table, see VM Files Summary.

Logical Disk UtilizationTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Administration Reports > VM SummaryThen, click on the Volume Usage thermometer.

Disk Path The path to the logical disk

VM Name Virtual machine name

Total Capacity Total amount of storage allocated to the VM

Used Amount of the VM’s allocated storage that is in use

Free Amount of the VM’s allocated storage that is available for use

Usage A thermometer represents the percentage of disk usage


VM Files SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Administration Reports > VM Files SummaryThis report lists all VM files. Use this report to identify space that could be reclaimed. View Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.

File Name Name of the file

File Path The file path in datastore format; for example: [storage] win2k/testing/bue11dtesting.vmx

Datastore The datastore in which this file resides

VM Server The host that is running the VM software (ESX)

VM Name Name of the virtual machine

VM Host Name The server that is hosting the VMs

VM Status Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, definite problem

VM Files Summary 363

File Type

File type identifier VmLog - log for VMware workstation activity (.log) VmNvram - VM BIOS state (.nvrm) VmDisk - contents of the VM’s hard drive (.vmdk) VmSnapshot - metadata about snapshots (.vmsd) VmConfigFile - primary configuration file (.vmx)

File Size Size of the file

Last Modified Date and time stamp of last file modification


Datastore UtilizationTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Datastore UtilizationView Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.

The Datastore Utilization Summary gives you the ability to identify what storage is in use and where it is located. Click on the Datastore link to view the Datastore Detail where you can view the Extents and then link to the corresponding Physical Disk Detail. In addition, the Datastore Detail provides a link to the array from which the storage has been provisioned.

Datastore Utilization 365

The name of the Datastore links to Datastore Detail.

Total capacity of the datastore

Total amount of the datastore that is in use‚ both VM usage and other files

Amount of the datastore that currently is unused and potentially available

Mouse over the thermometer to view the % of the total capacity used.

Size of the virtual machine, which includes VMDK files, log files, and snapshots; the sum of all the files taking up storage by this VM.This value links to the VM Files Summary, which lists the usage details.The sum of all virtual disks‚ VMDK (.vmdk files), that are occupying space. This sum does not include .snapshot metadata files, however, other outdated snapshot data may be in .vmdk files. For this reason, VMDK Used may exceed VM Disk Capacity, the amount that was configured when the VM was created.This is the amount of storage that was configured and presented to the Guest OS when the virtual disk was originally created for the VM.

Indicates VMs that are not currently in the inventory, but are taking up space in the Datastore. These are VMs that are not visible in VMware vCenter. Click this link to view the VM Files Summary.The number of hosts configured to access this datastore.

Number of virtual machines stored on this datastore

The number of extents that were added to expand the datastore (up to 32 physical storage extents).The number of disks used by this datastore (up to 32 physical disks)

The number of arrays from which this datastore gets physical storageLinks to Array Capacity and Utilization.

Name

Total Capacity

Used

Free

Usage

Total VM Used

VMDK Used

VM Disk Capacity

VM Not In Inventory

# Sharing VM Servers

# VMs

# Extents

# Disks

# Arrays


Datastore DetailThis report can be accessed from the Datastore Utilization report.To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Datastore UtilizationThen, click on a Datastore name.

Name Name of the datastore

Type Datastore type: a specific NFS file system or NAS

Server This field is related to Datastore type and will be populated only when the type is NAS.

Folder The VM folder in which this Datastore is located. This field is related to Datastore type and will be populated only when the type is NAS.

Multiple Host Access

Indicates if this datastore can be shared by multiple hosts: Yes or No

Last Updated Timestamp of the last write access

# VMs This number links to the VM Summary report, listing the VMs associated with this Datastore.

# Extents The number of extents that were added to expand the datastore (up to 32 physical storage extents).

# Disks The number of physical disks associated with the datastore

# Arrays The number of arrays from which this datastore gets physical storage links to Array Capacity & Utilization.

VMDK Used

The sum of all virtual disks‚ VMDK (.vmdk files). This sum does not include .snapshot metadata files, however, other outdated snapshot data may be in .vmdk files. For this reason, VMDK Used may exceed VM Disk Capacity, the amount that was configured when the VM was created.

Total VM Used Amount of the Datastore used by VMs

Total Capacity Total capacity of this Datastore

Datastore Detail 367

Datastore Capacity & Forecast

Extents

Free Capacity Available capacity in this Datastore

Used Capacity Amount of this Datastore’s capacity already in use

Capacity Usage Mouse over this thermometer to view the usage percentage

VM Disk Capacity

This is the amount of storage that was configured and presented to the Guest OS when the virtual disk was originally created for the VM. When you connect to a VM client, this capacity appears as hard disks.

VM Not In Inventory

Indicates VMs that are not currently in the inventory, but are taking up space in the Datastore. These are VMs that are not visible in VMware vCenter. Click this link to view the VM Files Summary.


Name of the storage device in the following 4-part format: <HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>:<disk partition> EXAMPLE: vmhba1:1:3:1 If vmhba appears in the name, it indicates a specific physical HBA on the ESX server. If the fourth segment is not included in the name, it indicates that the datastore has consumed the whole disk/LUN.VMFS or NFS

physical, logical

Capacity of this particular extent

The disk on which the extent resides

If there is a LUN mapping, a link to the corresponding array accesses the Array Capacity and Utilization report.

Shared VM Servers

For a description of the fields in this table, see VM Server Summary.

VM Utilization

For a description of these fields, see VM Summary.

Name

Type

Mode

Capacity

Disk

Array

Datastore Detail 369

Datastore Usage BreakdownTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Datastore Usage BreakdownUse this report to view a graphical representation of the file types comprising each datastore. See the Overview of Virtualization Manager for a diagram and description of the types of files that are maintained in a Datastore.


Physical Disk UtilizationTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Physical Disk UtilizationView Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.Use this report to view what disk space has been allocated to datastores.

Name The raw device mapping path, in the format: ‘vmhba<HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>’

VM Server Name of the VM Server

Disk Type SCSI device type, such as disk

Vendor Device manufacturer

Array The array on which the disk resides; links to the Array Capacity & Utilization report

LUNThe LUN path, in the format ‘<HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>:<disk partition>’Links to the LUN Utilization Summary

Operational State The device’s state of health

Total Capacity Total capacity of the disk

Physical Disk Utilization 371

Allocated Capacity The amount of the disk that has been allocated

# Datastores The number of datastores that are using the disk

# Extents The number of extents associated with the disk


Physical Disk DetailTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Physical Disk UtilizationThen, click on a Name link.

Name The raw device mapping path, in the format: vmhba<HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>

VM Server Name of the VM Server

State Operational state of the disk, such as ok and degraded

Model Model of the disk

Vendor Device manufacturer

SCSI Level The device’s SCSI level, an indicator of clock and bus speeds

Last Updated Last date and time of data collection

Disk Type SCSI device type, such as disk

Total Capacity Capacity of this disk

Physical Disk Detail 373

LUN

The LUN path, in the format: <HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>:<disk partition>

Links to the LUN Utilization Summary.

ArrayName of the array in which the disk is located; links to the Array Capacity & Utilization report to view the array from with the LUN was provisioned.

# FC Targets Number of Fibre Channel targets‚ paths to the array from the host

# iSCSI Targets The number of paths to the iSCSI array from the host

iSCSI Target Name The actual target name from the array’s perspective

iSCSI Node Name The actual node name from the array’s perspective

Array Node WWN Storage array node World Wide Name

Array Port WWN Storage array port’s World Wide Name

HBA Node WWN Host bus adapter node World Wide Name

HBA Port WWN Host bus adapter port World Wide Name


VM Performance SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Performance Reports > VM Performance SummaryView Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.When a VM exhibits performance issues, it could stem from either the server, the actual storage, or other network factors. Once server bottlenecks are addressed, the next step is to determine if there’s an issue with the LUN and disks. While vCenter provides performance statistics, this information is not always readily available to Storage Administrators.The VM Performance Summary enables a Storage Administrator to have an at-a-glance look at I/O performance statistics: CPU, Memory, and Disk I/O. In addition, Disk I/O is broken out into reads and writes, with latency statistics.

Focusing on Specific I/O StatisticsTo isolate a particular set of statistics—for example, Disk I/O—use the Advanced options in the Report Designer and click the relevant checkbox.

VM Performance Summary 375

All values represent the average for the interval selected in the “Group By” option.

Name The name of the VM. Click on this link to view VM Server Details, if it is a host, or VM Detail, if it is a VM.

Type Type of partition: host server or VM

CPU Pct The VM’s CPU usage percentage

CPU Max Pct Maximum CPU usage percentage for the report’s Group By interval

CPU MHz Average processor speed for the report’s Group By interval

CPU Max MHz Maximum processor speed for the report’s Group By interval

Memory Pct Average memory usage percentage for the report’s Group By interval

Memory Max Pct Maximum memory percentage for the report’s Group By interval


Memory MB Average memory usage for the report’s Group By interval

Memory Max MB Maximum memory usage for the report’s Group By interval

Disk I/O Data Xfer (KB/sec)

Disk I/O average transfer rate for all disks for the VM

Disk I/O Latency (ms)

Disk I/O wait time, which is the average for the report’s Group By interval

Disk Read Data Xfer (KB/sec)

Disk read transfer rate, average for the report’s Group By interval

Disk Read # Reads Average number of disk reads for the report’s Group By interval

Disk Read Latency (ms)

Disk read wait time, which is the average for the report’s Group By interval

Disk Write Data Xfer (KB/sec)

Disk write transfer rate for the report’s Group By interval

Disk Write # Writes Average number of disk writes for the report’s Group By interval

Disk Write Latency (ms)

Disk write wait time, which is the average for the report’s Group By interval

Show Chart Check the boxes for which you want to generate charts.

VM Performance Summary 377

VM Performance Over TimeTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Performance Reports > VM Performance Over Time


Datastore Performance SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Performance Reports > Datastore Performance Summary

Datastore Name Datastore name links to Datastore Detail

Disk Name Disk name links to the Physical Disk Detail

VM Server VM Server links to the VM Server Detail

Disk I/O Data Xfer (KB/sec)

Disk I/O average for all disks



Disk Read Data Xfer (KB/sec)

Disk read transfer rate, average for the report’s Group By interval

Disk Read # Reads Average number of disk reads for the report’s Group By interval



Disk Write Data Xfer (KB/sec)

Disk write transfer rate for the report’s Group By interval

Disk Write # Writes Average number of disk writes for the report’s Group By interval

Datastore Performance Summary 379



Show Chart Check the boxes for which you want to generate charts.


Physical Disk Performance SummaryTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Performance Reports > Physical Disk Performance Summary

Disk name links to the Physical Disk Detail

VM Server links to the VM Server Detail

Number links to the Datastore Utilization Summary

Disk I/O average for all disks


Disk read speed, average for the report’s Group By interval

Average number of disk reads for the report’s Group By interval


Disk write speed for the report’s Group By interval

Average number of disk writes for the report’s Group By interval


Check the boxes for which you want to generate charts

Physical Disk Name

VM Server

# Datastore

Disk I/O Avg Usage


Disk Read Speed (MB/sec)

Disk Read # Reads


Disk Write Speed (MB/sec)

Disk Write # Writes


Show Chart

Physical Disk Performance Summary 381

Physical Disk Performance Over TimeTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Performance Reports > Physical Disk Performance Over Time


VM Size ForecastTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Forecast & Planning > VM Size ForecastThis VM report projects the growth of the VM over time, based on historical data.View Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.

The VM name links to the VM Server Detail.

VM Size Forecast 383

Datastore Capacity ForecastTo access this report, in the Navigation pane select:Virtualization Manager > Forecast & Planning > Datastore Capacity ForecastView Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.

The Datastore name links to the Datastore Detail.


Index

Aapplications

at risk, 263over-provisioned, 264storage dashboard, 265

arraycapacity, 238, 290capacity forecasting, 260group details, 255port utilization, 258

Bbackup

duration report, 126bar chart

example, 91billing

chargeback report, 278usage policy, 212

Ccapacity

at risk, 282planning, 199

capacity reportsarray capacity, 238, 290array forecast, 260array group, 255array port, 258chargeback, 278host detail, 245host forecast, 261host utilization, 243hosts at risk, 286LUN utilization, 251LUNs at risk, 282over-provisioned

hosts, 288over-provisioning, 284

changingpassword, 12reports, 35

chargeback, 278client

consecutive errors, 130NetWorker instance, 227protection summary, 155

columns, 34command center, 144

content pane, 2

Ddashboard

command center, 144creating, 56data protection, 146media forecasting, 200operations, 142storage pools, 157

data protection, 146deleting reports, 37designing reports, 14disk

usage & performance, 181drive

performance, 187, 189utilization, 187

durationbackup/restore, 126

Eemailing reports, 45error

consecutive, 130error log

summary, 128export reports, 40

Ffailed jobs, 54forecasting, 199

array capacity, 260host capacity, 261media, 200media availability, 203media consumption, 204scratch pool, 207tape drive usage, 206

Hhome page, 60host

at risk, 286capacity forecasting, 261over-provisioned, 288utilization detail, 245utilization summary, 243

Jjob

detail, 121duration, 126notes, 124queue, 135running, 135status summary, 113summary by server, 134summary report, 115volume summary, 125

Llog

error, 128login/logout, 10LUN

at risk, 282over-provisioned, 284utilization, 251

Mmedia

availability forecasting, 203

consumption forecast, 204current summary, 164forecasting

dashboard, 200tape detail, 166tape summary, 165usage details, 205

menus, 3message of the day, 147mission control, 152monthly summary, 133

Nnavigation

report, 1NetApp reports, 290note

adding to job, 121notes, 124

Ooperations dashboard, 142over-provisioning, 284

hosts, 288

Index 385

LUN, 284

Ppassword, 12policy

backup details, 220billing & chargeback, 212NetBackup, 219NetWorker, 224TSM domain details, 223TSM domains, 222

profile, user, 11protection

client, 155

Qqueue

job summary, 135

Rreal time status, 197refresh reports, 34report template designer

formatting, 88SQL Query, 73

reportschanging, 35custom, 61deleting, 37designing, 14emailing, 45exporting reports, 40finding, 1forecast, 199generating, 30instances, 18job summary, 115parameters, 24refresh, 34saving, 36scheduling, 40scope, 19, 20searching, 37sharing, 53templates, 18viewing, 49

restoreduration report, 126

Ssaving reports, 36scheduling reports, 40scope, 19, 20

scratch pool, 207search

report, 1, 37servers, 22

serverconsumption

summary, 217details, 148groups, 151search, 22

service levelbackup start time, 173

sharing reports, 53SLA

backup duration, 177backup start time, 173backup status, 175

sorting, 34SQL query, 73storage pools, 157storage unit

summary, 196

Ttape drive

forecasting usage, 206scratch pool, 207usage, 206

time zone, 120TSM

database utilization, 193storage pools, 157

Uutilization

chargeback, 278largest volume, 132TSM database, 193

Vvolume

largest, 132summary, 125utilization, 132


Date post:	26-Dec-2014
Category:	Documents
Upload:	frank-cheng
View:	494 times
Download:	0 times

APTARE Storage Console UserGuide

Documents